NEXTON SQUARE
SC SUMMERVILLE BRIGHTON LLC - NORTH CHARLESTON, SC
Issued for Pricing
ARCHITECT PROJECT NUMBER 017091
McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 00 01 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL DOCUMENT ISSUE DATE Date of Original Issue: Unless noted otherwise by a revised date, all documents and sections in this Project Manual are dated March 23, 2018. Revision Date: Revised documents will be noted with the date of its revision in the Revision Date column of this Table of Contents. Refer to Structural, Civil, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Landscape Drawings for Specifications for those disciplines.
SECTION NUMBER TITLE REVISION DATE
00 01 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 4
Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 02.09.2018 MPS Project 017091
DIVISION 00 - INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 01 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS - NOT USED
DIVISION 00 - CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS - NOT USED
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 - SUMMARY 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS - NOT USED
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 15 17 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS 05 52 13 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 20 23.10 - INTERIOR WOOD CARPENTRY
00 01 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 4
McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 02.09.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION 07 26 16 - UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS 07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS 07 42 13 - METAL WALL PANELS 07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING 07 46 46 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS 08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 - GLAZING
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 73 16 - METAL CANOPIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED
00 01 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 of 4
Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 02.09.2018 MPS Project 017091
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
END OF SECTION
00 01 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 of 4
McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE PART 1 – GENERAL
ARCHITECT MCMILLAN PAZDAN SMITH ARCHITECTURE
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF DOCUMENT
00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE Page 1 of 2
Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 01.08.2018 MPS Project 017091
00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE Page 2 of 2
McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Nexton Square Retail Village. B. Owner's Name: SC Summerville Brighton LLC. C. Architect's Name: McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture. D. Project Description: 1. New construction of 11 retail buildings which will be ready for tenant-fit out by the Owner. Design include Structural, Civil, Mechanical, and Electrical. The Engineers have placed their Specifications on the Drawings. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on stipulated sum as described in AIA Document A101 SCOSE. 1.03 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site to allow: 1. Work by Owner's separate Contractors. 2. Work by Owner. C. Contractor shall coordinate site access, staging locations, and parking with Owner. D. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. E. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage. F. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy, malodorous, or dusty work to the hours coordinated with Owner during pre-construction conference. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
01 10 00 - SUMMARY Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 10 00 - SUMMARY Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for acceptance of Alternates. B. Description of Alternates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors; alternate for hurricane resistant doors. B. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts; alternate for hurricane resistant system and doors. 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted in the Bid Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. C. Execution: Accepted alternates shall be executed under the same conditions as other Work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 - Storefront Systems: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 08 43 13 and Drawing number ____ including storefront and door systems. 2. Alternate Item: Section 08 43 13 and Drawing number ____ including bid for hurricane-resistant storefront systems and doors. B. Alternate No. 2 - Sectional Doors: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 08 36 13 and Drawing number ____ including manual sectional doors. 2. Alternate Item: Section 08 36 13 and Drawing number ____ including manual hurricane-resistant sectional doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF DOCUMENT
01 23 00 - ALTERNATES Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 23 00 - ALTERNATES Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: See General Conditions for definition. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request; Current Edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. A Substitution Request for specified products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable. 4. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner. 5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 6. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. B. A Substitution Request for specified fabricators and installers constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer, but was unable to come to commercial, or other terms. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 1. Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics. D. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. E. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. 1. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into single document. 3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Submittal Form: 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A. See this form for additional information and instructions.
01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. C. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. 1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways. 2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors. 3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of: a. Owner's compensation to the Architect for any required redesign, time spent processing and evaluating the request. b. Other construction by Owner. c. Other unanticipated project considerations. D. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: 1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without having received prior approval. 2. Without a separate written request. 3. When acceptance will require revisions to the Contract Documents. 3.03 RESOLUTION A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form. 3.04 ACCEPTANCE A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Contract Conditions. 3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved and rejected Requests. END OF DOCUMENT
01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General administrative requirements. B. Electronic document submittal service. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures. I. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: General product requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AIA C106 - Digital Data Licensing Agreement; 2013. B. AIA G810 - Transmittal Letter; 2001. 1.04 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect: 1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI). 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Design data. 6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7. Applications for payment and change order requests. 8. Progress schedules. 9. Coordination drawings. 10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF, MS Word, or MS Excel) format, as appropriate to the document, and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to Requests for Interpretation (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 5. Users of the service need an email address, internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the service provider. 6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed electronic documents will not be reviewed. 7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. B. Submittal Service: The selected service is: 1. Newforma Project Cloud: www.newformaprojectcloud.com. C. Alternative Submittal Service: 1. Contractor's alternative submittal service will be considered. Submit to the Owner and Architect for approval. 3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at two-week intervals, maximum time between meetings. Additional meetings to be scheduled as needed. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.05 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following: 1. An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in the Contract Documents. 2. A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent. B. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI. C. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of the Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. a. Review, coordinate, and comment on requests originating with subcontractors and/or materials suppliers. b. Do not forward requests which solely require internal coordination between subcontractors. 2. Prepare using software provided by the Electronic Document Submittal Service. 3. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred. D. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included. 1. Include in each request Contractor's signature attesting to good faith effort to determine from the Contract Documents information requiring interpretation. 2. Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following:: a. Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b. Approval of substitutions (see Section - 01 60 00 - Product Requirements) c. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). d. Different methods of performing work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). 3. Improper RFIs: Requests not prepared in conformance to requirements of this section, and/or missing key information required to render an actionable response. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. 4. Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on, or reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents, with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. E. Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1. Official Project name and number, and any additional required identifiers established in Contract Documents. 2. Owner's, Architect's, and Contractor's names.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Discrete and consecutive RFI number, and descriptive subject/title. 4. Issue date, and requested reply date. 5. Reference to particular Contract Document(s) requiring additional information/interpretation. Identify pertinent drawing and detail number and/or specification section number, title, and paragraph(s). 6. Annotations: Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered the request. 7. Contractor's suggested resolution: A written and/or a graphic solution, to scale, is required in cases where clarification of coordination issues is involved, for example; routing, clearances, and/or specific locations of work shown diagrammatically in Contract Documents. If applicable, state the likely impact of the suggested resolution on Contract Time or the Contract Sum. F. Attachments: Include sketches, coordination drawings, descriptions, photos, submittals, and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request. G. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project. 1. Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis. 2. Note dates of when each request is made, and when a response is received. 3. Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response. 4. Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date. 5. Remove improper or frivolous RFIs. H. Review Time: Architect will respond and return RFIs to Contractor within seven calendar days of receipt. For the purpose of establishing the start of the mandated response period, RFIs received after 12:00 noon will be considered as having been received on the following regular working day. 1. Response period may be shortened or lengthened for specific items, subject to mutual agreement, and recorded in a timely manner in progress meeting minutes. I. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner. 1. Response may include a request for additional information, in which case the original RFI will be deemed as having been answered, and an amended one is to be issued forthwith. Identify the amended RFI with an R suffix to the original number. 2. Do not extend applicability of a response to specific item to encompass other similar conditions, unless specifically so noted in the response. 3. Upon receipt of a response, promptly review and distribute it to all affected parties, and update the RFI Log. 4. Notify Architect within seven calendar days if an additional or corrected response is required by submitting an amended version of the original RFI, identified as specified above. 3.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedule. 2. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values. 3. Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction. 4. Arrange information to include scheduled date for initial submittal, specification number and title, submittal category (for review or for information), description of item of work covered, and role and name of subcontractor. 5. Account for time required for preparation, review, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates. a. For assemblies, equipment, systems comprised of multiple components and/or requiring detailed coordination with other work, allow for additional time to make corrections or revisions to initial submittals, and time for their review. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for initial selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. 3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in conformance to requirements of Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 78 00. C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements: 1. Use a single transmittal for related items. 2. Submit separate packages of submittals for review and submittals for information, when included in the same specification section. 3. Transmit using approved form. a. Use Form AIA G810. 4. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential numerical suffix. 5. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy. 6. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp will not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned. 7. Deliver each submittal on date noted in submittal schedule, unless an earlier date has been agreed to by all affected parties, and is of the benefit to the project. a. Upload submittals in electronic form to Electronic Document Submittal Service website. 8. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. a. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. b. For sequential reviews involving Architect's consultants, Owner, or another affected party, allow an additional 7 days. 9. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. 10. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 11. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
12. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 13. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed, unless they are partial submittals for distinct portion(s) of the work, and have received prior approval for their use. B. Product Data Procedures: 1. Submit only information required by individual specification sections. 2. Collect required information into a single submittal. 3. Submit concurrently with related shop drawing submittal. 4. Do not submit (Material) Safety Data Sheets for materials or products. C. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related work. 2. Include the following as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. f. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 3. Use of reproductions of the Contract Documents in digital data form to create shop drawings is only allowed when permission is granted by the Architect. a. To request permission for reproducing Contract Documents, submit such request to the Architect. b. If permission is granted by the Architect, the licensing agreement will be in the form of an executed AIA C106 - Digital Data Licensing Agreement. 4. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. D. Samples Procedures: 1. Transmit related items together as single package. 2. Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing installation locations. 3.12 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. Even with a stamp, if it is determined by the Architect that the Contractor's review is inadequate, the shop drawing(s) will be returned for Contractor's review. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections to comply with contract documents, if required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: 1. No Corrections Noted: Proceed with the work in accordance with the contract documents and in compliance with the building codes, based on the information provided in this submittal. 2. Make Corrections Noted: Proceed with the work of this submittal incorporating the notes thereon, and in compliance with the contract documents and the building codes.
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Submit Corrected Copy for File: Same as 2, above, but submit the corrected copy to the Architect. 4. Revise and Resubmit: Do not proceed with the work affected by the comments. Revise as noted, and resubmit. 5. Rejected See Notes Below: Do not proceed with the work affected by this submittal. Comply with notes. 6. Not Reviewed: Contractor must review and stamp submittal prior to Architect's review: Do not proceed with the work affected by this submittal. 7. Architect's Review is not Required by Contract Documents: No Action Taken. END OF SECTION
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 9 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 10 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Delegated Design C. Quality assurance. D. References and standards. E. Testing and inspection agencies and services. F. Control of installation. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation; 2016. C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2015a. D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a. E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection; 2014a. F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2015. G. IAS AC89 - Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project.
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. E. Delegated Design 1. Designer Qualifications: Where delegated design is to be performed under the construction contract, provide the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 2. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems that comply with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 3. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform service or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to the Architect. 4. Delegated Design Services Certification: In addition to shop drawings, product data and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor by a design professional. 5. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads and of the factors used in performing these services. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3. Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is accredited under IAS AC89. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, and ASTM D3740. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 3. Laboratory Qualifications: Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89. 4. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. 5. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 6. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program.
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Architect. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. END OF SECTION
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Vehicular access and parking. F. Field offices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 53 - Security Procedures 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Cell Phone: Assigned to Contractor for use on this Project. Capabilities for connection to internet modem and email account. 2. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; cable and wi-fi. 3. Email: Account/address reserved for project use. 4. Computer with Printer/Scanner: For producing project files in PDF format for submittal to Architect and Owner. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.07 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic. E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. F. Provide one parking space for Owner use. G. Provide one parking space for Architect use. 1.09 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack, and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 8 persons. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing structures. 1.10 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION
01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.
01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. I. Do not store products directly on the ground. J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. K. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. L. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. M. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. N. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION
01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Cutting and patching. D. Cleaning and protection. E. Starting of systems and equipment. F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. G. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's correction punch list. H. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, electronic document submittal service. B. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations for bracing and shoring. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Use of explosives is not permitted. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. D. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to compliance with regulatory requirements, conduct construction operations in compliance with NFPA 241, including applicable recommendations in Appendix A. B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. C. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. F. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This Article refers to new work installed which needs to be altered during construction process to complete all Work of the Project. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from project periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
F. Protect work from spilled liquids. If work is exposed to spilled liquids, immediately remove protective coverings, dry out work, and replace protective coverings. G. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.07 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at designated location. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Owner and Architect on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. E. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. D. Include color coded wiring diagrams in accordance with Owner's standards. Refer to mechanical, electrical and plumbing specifications. E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. L. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. M. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. N. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. O. Include test and balancing reports.
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS"; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Source data. b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. c. Operation and maintenance data. d. Field quality control data. e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 4. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, provide a tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of at least 20 pages of typed text. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. END OF SECTION
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 03 15 16 WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Crystalline waterstop joint system consisting of waterstop grout and treatment for non-moving construction joints. B. Waterproof joint design for non-moving joints in concrete consisting of swelling waterstop and treatment to provide water tightness from a hydrophilic, swelling strip and additional long-term performance from permanent crystalline integral waterproofing. C. Preformed crack inducing device to control and waterproof locations of cracks during concrete curing. D. Predetermined crack control using formed keyways. E. Treatment of penetrations in assemblies. F. Treatment of tie holes in formed concrete assemblies. G. Provide waterproofing at poured concrete locations and at elevator pits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Contract descriptions, description of alterations work, work by others, future work, occupancy conditions, use of site and premises, work sequence. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings, progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination. C. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing, inspection, mock-ups, reports, certificates; use of reference standards. D. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance (O&M) data, warranties and bonds. E. Concrete specifications and details found on Structural Drawings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016. B. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a. C. ASTM C1583 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method); 2013. D. ASTM C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2010. E. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015. F. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2014.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
H. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2014. I. ASTM D792 - Standard Test Method for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement; 2013. J. NSF/ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2016. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. A meeting shall be held prior to commencing work of this section with the Contractor, installer, and Owner’s testing agency and the Consultant and waterproofing manufacturer's representative in attendance to verify and review the following: a. Project requirements for waterproofing as set out in Contract Documents. b. Manufacturer's product data. c. Applicable application instructions which focuses on this project's specific requirements. d. Substrate conditions and procedures for substrate preparation and waterproofing installation. B. Scheduling: Follow approved Schedule for Work of this Section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on waterstop and treatment products certifying compliance with specified performance requirements, storage and handling recommendations and application instruction method. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing joints, penetrations and construction assemblies. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and field test requirements. E. Source Quality Control: Obtain all waterproofing products from a single manufacturer including construction joint details and leak repair products. F. Field Quality Control Submittals: Provide Field Reports as outlined in this Section; also indicate, in a spreadsheet format, the locations of the waterproofing and the methods used at those locations. This may also be shown on Record Drawings. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concrete construction joints which received waterproofing per this Section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with at least 20 years of experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. C. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original undamaged containers, with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. B. Store materials in dry environment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Do not use materials stored for more than twenty-four (24) months from date of manufacture. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Do not install products when surface temperature is below 40 deg. F. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing materials from date of Substantial Performance of Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: Kryton International, Inc.; Krystol Waterstop System. Other manufacturers which may be considered include but are not limited to the following: 1. CETCO. 2. Henry. 3. Sika. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Waterproofing system is comprised of waterstop grout, waterstop treatment, swelling waterstop, and crack inducing waterstop. These products are used to waterproof construction joints, penetrations, tie holds, and control joints found in concrete construction. B. Refer to Concrete Specifications found on the Structural Drawings for coordination with concrete mix and locations where waterproofing will be required. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Crystalline Waterstop Grout: Fiber reinforced, non-shrink, non-toxic, fast setting, hydrophilic: 1. Working time at 68 degrees F and 50 percent RH: 30 minutes. 2. Hydrostatic head pressure resistance: 460 ft. 3. Compressive Strength to ASTM C109/C109M: a. 3480 psi at 24 hrs. b. 4351 psi at 7 days. c. 5076 psi at 28 days. d. 6700 psi at 56 days. 4. Pull-off Strength to ASTM C1583: 400 psi. 5. Shape of crystal: when observed under 30x magnification, crystalline growth will be long and needle shaped, allowing crystals to grow deeper and fill more space.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
6. Certifications: NSF/ANSI 61 certified for use with potable water. 7. Acceptable Product: Krystol Waterstop Grout. B. Waterproofing Treatment: cementitious, hydrophilic, crack resistant, waterproofing slurry. 1. Working time at 68 degrees F and 50 percent RH: 35 minutes. 2. Shape of crystal: when observed under 30x magnification, crystalline growth will be long and needle shaped, allowing crystals to grow deeper and fill more space. 3. Certifications: NSF/ANSI 61 certified for use with potable water. 4. Acceptable Product: Krystol Waterstop Treatment. C. Swelling Waterstop: Swelling, hydrophilic, synthetic flexible rubber waterstop strip: 1. Appearance: Yellow colour, trapezoid shape. 2. Dimensions: 0.20 inch by 3/4 inch. 3. Density: 0.69 - 0.72 oz/in3. 4. Hardness (Shore A): 24 +/- 3 sh A. 5. Tensile Strength: 435 psi. 6. Swelling Performance in clean water: 1000 percent. 7. Swelling Performance in concrete water: 800 percent. 8. Swelling Performance in salt water: 300 percent. 9. Acceptable Product: Krytonite Swelling Waterstop complete with Krytonite Adhesive. D. Crack Inducing Waterstop: Preformed crack control joint, heat weldable PVC, chemical; resistant: 1. Colour: Yellow 2. Dimensions: 6 inch wide by 1-5/8 inch thick. 3. Head Pressure Resistance (Water Column): 100 feet. 4. Water absorption to ASTM C5: 0.15% max. 5. Tear resistance to ASTM D624: 300 lb/in min. 6. Ultimate elongation to ASTM D638: 350% min. 7. Tensile strength to ASTM D638: 2000 psi min. 8. Low temperature brittleness to ASTM D746: Passes at minus 35°F. 9. Stiffness in flexure to ASTM D746: 700 psi min. 10. Specific gravity to ASTM D792: 1.38 max. 11. Hardness, Shore A to ASTM D2240: 79±3 12. Potable Water Containment: Products of this Section shall be certified to NSF/ANSI 61 for use with potable water. 13. Acceptable Product: Kryton Crack Inducing Waterstop. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that adjacent concrete assemblies have been constructed using crystalline waterproofing concrete mix in accordance with specifications on Structural Drawings. C. Verify that waterstop assemblies will not be displaced or damaged during placement of concrete.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Single Protection - using swelling waterstop: 1. Provide swelling waterstop to locations indicated on the Drawings or as recomended by manufacturer or AHJ. 2. Install in dry conditions only. Installation during heavy rain or in contact with water can result in a premature swelling of the strip, which must be avoided. 3. Install swelling waterstop with adhesive or mechanical fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Trim swelling waterstop to fit. B. Double Protection 1. Internal Grout Method: a. Preparation: 1) Ensure all surfaces are clean; remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 2) Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. b. Install waterstop grout to prepared surfaces in a triangular strip 2 inch wide by 1.25 inch high with uniformly angled sides, centred in the construction assembly. c. Apply coating of waterstop treatment to the entire joint area in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. d. Place concrete indicated on Structural Drawing specifications. 2. Internal Swelling Method: a. Preparation: 1) Ensure all surfaces are clean; remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 2) Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. b. Apply coating of waterstop treatment to the entire joint area in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. c. Install swelling waterstop with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. d. Trim swelling waterstop to fit. e. Place [concrete][shotcrete] to Section [03 30 00][03 37 13]. 3. External Grout Method: 4. Preparation: Ensure all surfaces are clean; remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 5. Apply coating of waterstop treatment to the entire joint area in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 6. Keyway Preparation: a. Install tapered wooden strips on the interior of the formwork adjacent to the positive side of the assembly and to locations indicated on Drawings. b. Keyways should be formed 1.5 inch deep by 1.5 inch wide, tapering to 1.25 inch width into the wall. 7. Place concrete per Structural Drawing specifications.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
8. Ensure that keyway is clean, remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 9. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. 10. Tightly pack crystalline waterstop grout into the keyway flush with surface. 11. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions C. Triple Protection: 1. Preparation: a. Ensure all surfaces are clean; remove form release agents, dirt or debris. b. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. 2. Apply coating of waterstop treatment to the entire joint area in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Install swelling waterstop with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Trim swelling waterstop to fit. 5. Keyway Preparation: a. Install tapered wooden strips on the interior of the formwork adjacent to the positive side of the assembly and to locations indicated on Drawings. b. Keyways should be formed 1.5 inch deep by 1.5 inch wide, tapering to 1.25 inch width into the wall. 6. Place concrete as specified on Structural Drawings. 7. Ensure that keyway is clean, remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 8. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. 9. Tightly pack crystalline waterstop grout into the keyway flush with surface. 10. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 CRACK CONTROL JOINTS A. External Grout Method for formed keyways and shrinkage crack repair: 1. Keyway Preparation: Install tapered wooden strips to both sides of concrete forms to ACI 301and to spacing indicated on the Drawings or as follows if not shown: a. Wall Thickness Joint Spacing 1) 12 inch 20 feet 2) 10 inch 16 feet 3) 8 inch 13 feet b. Keyways should be formed 1.5 inch deep by 1.5 inch wide, tapering to 1.25 inch width into the wall. 2. Place concrete per Structural specifications on Drawings. 3. Preparation for Crack Repair: a. Ensure that concrete drying shrinkage is complete. b. Chase the length of cracks. Provide rectangular-shaped chase that is 1.5 inch deep by 1 inch wide. 4. Ensure that keyway and chase is clean, remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 5. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. 6. Tightly pack crystalline waterstop grout into the keyway or chase flush with surface.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
7. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Crack Inducing Waterstop Method for blindside formwork applications: 1. Fasten crack inducing waterstop to exterior concrete form at required control joint location, at locations shown on Drawings, and directly opposite formed keyways. 2. Provide crack inducing waterstops and keyways to ACI 301 and as recommended by manufacturer: 3. Place concrete; refer to Structural Drawings. 4. Keyways should be formed 1.5 inch deep by 1.5 inch wide, tapering to 1.2 inch width into the wall. 5. Ensure that keyway is clean, remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 6. Saturate the surface by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. 7. Tightly pack crystalline waterstop grout into the keyway flush with surface. 8. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 PENETRATION AND FORMWORK TIE HOLES A. Preparation: 1. Tie Holes: Remove plastic cones, snap-ties and tapered rods from the concrete to expose tie holes. 2. Penetrations: a. Provide 1.5 inch deep by 1 inch wide chase around all penetrations. b. Prepare metal penetrations by mechanically abrading all surfaces in contact with waterproof treatment by sanding or sandblasting; remove all grease, oil, corrosion, and scale. c. Prepare plastic penetrations by embedding silica sand into a coating of plastic cement applied to all surfaces in contact with waterproof treatment. 3. Ensure that all surfaces are clean; remove form release agents, dirt or debris. 4. Saturate surfaces by high pressure water blasting. Remove all standing water so the surface is saturated-surface-dry (SSD) condition. B. Patch tie holes using crystalline waterstop grout C. Tightly pack crystalline waterstop grout into the chase flush with surface. D. Cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Do not conceal installed waterproofing treatment before review by Consultant [and waterproofing manufacturer's representative. D. Site Tests and Inspections: 1. Following the installation of crystalline waterstop or swelling waterstop, visually inspect the application to verify presence of the waterstop in the correct location and proper dimensions. 2. Following the installation of Treatment, visually inspect the application to verify the presence of the “gold” slurry coat covering the entire contact area of the joint including the previously installed triangle of crystalline waterstop or swelling waterstop.
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
E. If leaks are discovered, verify with manufacturer whether time period for self-sealing properties of the treated concrete has been exceeded. Make repairs as recommended by the manufacturer and repeat test until no leaks are observed. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect completed assemblies from damage after application. END OF DOCUMENT
03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 04 26 16 ADHERED MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thin Brick; two system designs: 1. Applied to metal panel wall system. 2. Applied over concrete masonry units. B. Glazed thin brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Wire mesh; mortar for scratch and leveling coats. E. Adhesives. F. Accessories. G. In addition to the referenced standards, refer to BIA Technical Notes No. 28C, dated April 2014 for Thin Brick Veneer for installation and BIA Technical Note No. 13, dated December 2005, for Ceramic Glazed Brick Exterior Walls. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. B. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012 (Revised). C. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised). D. ASTM C1405 - Standard Specification for Glazed Brick (Single Fired, Brick Units); 2016. E. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2016. F. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile; 2016. G. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2015a. H. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. I. ASTM D751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). J. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. K. BIA Technical Note No. 28C - Thin Brick Veneer; April 2014. L. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013. M. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2017.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 1 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
N. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013 (Revised). O. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2013). P. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. Q. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a. R. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a. S. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2016c. T. ASTM C1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale; 2014. U. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance – Design and Detailing; 2005. V. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2016. W. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for metal wall panels, thin brick units, mortar, grout, and adhesive. C. Samples: Submit four samples of thin brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that thin brick units, adhesives, mortar, and grout meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Brick manufacturer's instructions for installation of products for complete system; include both types of systems specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the BIA Technical Note No. 28C, ANSI A108/A118/A136.1, and TCNA (HB) on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least five years of documented experience.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 2 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar, grout, adhesives, accessories, substrate, and representative wall openings in mock-ups for both systems specified. B. Locate where directed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty that the work of this Section shall be free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period indicated in this paragraph. The manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, pointing mortars, and other installation materials shall provide a written 25-year warranty which covers materials and labor for materials applied over concrete masonry units and 15-year warranty for products installed over steel studs/cement board. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 THIN BRICK A. Manufacturers: 1. Boral Bricks, Inc: www.boralbricks.com. 2. Basis-of-Design: Endicott Clay Products Co: www.endicott.com. 3. General Shale Brick: www.generalshale.com. 4. Metro Brick: www.metrothinbrick.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Thin Brick: ASTM C1088 and tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 1. Type: TBX. 2. Size: Manufacturer's standard Modular. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Tolerances: 1/16 inch. 5. Color, Texture, Range, Special Shapes: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Trim Units: Matching thin brick. 2.02 GLAZED THIN BRICK A. Full size bricks, manufactured according to ASTM C216 and brick veneer according to ASTM C1088. The glazes are applied in a second firing cycle meeting ASTM C1405 Section 7 and 8. B. Physical Properties:
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 3 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Brick durability is determined by their resistance to freeze/thaw damage. Class Exterior is intended for use where a resistance to freeze/thaw cycles is required. 2. Compressive Strength: Glazed Brick is a structural clay masonry unit. These brick meet or exceed the minimum compressive strength requirements, in most cases many times over. C. Properties of Finish (Glaze): Minimum standards for the ceramic glazed finish substantiating durability, building safety and lifetime low maintenance. 1. Imperviousness: Subject the finish to a permanent blue-black ink test for 5 minutes then washing with a wet cloth and running water. No stain visible from 5 feet except a slight discoloration in the depressions on matte and distressed surfaces and in crevices formed by units body texture. 2. Opacity: Discoloration from the body should not be visible through the glaze, when so specified. Consult manufacturer on clear or custom glazes. 3. Resistance to Fading: The color of the glaze will not change when subjected to chemical resistance tests. 4. Chemical Resistance: The color and texture of the glaze will not change when subjected to the hydrochloric and potassium hydroxide chemical resistance tests. 5. Resistance to Crazing: The glaze will not craze, spall or crack when subjected to one cycle of autoclaving in the crazing test. 6. Flame Spread, Fuel Contribution and Smoke Density: Rated zero in all categories when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (equivalent UL 723). No toxic fumes. 7. Hardness and Abrasion Resistance: Glaze must resist scratching by steel or ordinary glass and be rated above 5 on the Mohs Hardness Scale. Abrasion tested under Wear Index Method No. 6192 (Federal Standard Test No. 141). D. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: 1. Pacific Clay Products, Inc.; Gran Brique. www.granbrique.com 2. Size: 3/4 inch by 2-1/4 inch by 7-5/8 inch. 3. Color: Antigorio Onyx and Civillina Blue. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. 1. Known Available Product: Laticrete PermaColor Grout as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Other manufacturers may be used as approved by Architect. Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar: Weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable; conform to ANSI A118.4 and ASTM E84: 1. Compressive Strength: Greater than 2,500 psi. 2. Bond Strength: Greater than 450 psi. 3. Smoke and Flame Contribution: Zero.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 4 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Known Available Product: Laticrete 254 Platinum as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Other manufacturers may be used as approved by Architect. Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. D. Latex Portland Cement Grout: Weather, frost and shock resistant in compliance with the following physical requirements per ANSI A118.7: 1. Compressive Strength: 4,500 psi. 2. Tensile Strength: 500 psi. 3. Flexural Strength: 1,250 psi. 4. Water Absorption: Less than 5 percent. 5. Linear Shrinkage: Less than 0.05 percent. 6. Smoke and Flame Contribution: Zero per ASTM E84. 7. Known Available Product: Laticrete PermaColor Grout as manufactured by Laticrete International or product approved by Architect. Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch total thickness, shop precoated with fluoropolymer coating in color selected by Architect. B. Flashing Sealant/Adhesives: Silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane, or other type required or recommended by flashing manufacturer; type capable of adhering to type of flashing used. 2.05 METAL WALL PANELS A. Metal System Panels: 28 gage hot-dipped galvanized steel metal, G-60, components formed to align brick courses and to support and ensure a mechanical bond of each brick in place. 1. Panels shall be chem-dry treated, and be a minimum 0.014 inch (0.36 mm) thickness with continuous carrying brick ledges (every course of brick) with minimum thickness per ledge: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm). 2. Panels shall have a continuous interlock every third course, minimum thickness, 0.042 inch (1.07 mm). 3. Panels shall be able to fold out corners, door and window sections, and have a continuous linear array of holes to receive adhesive and have a continuous array of mortar receptors to lock in mortar mix. 4. Panels shall be designed to carry brick load evenly on entire wall surface without the use of footings, starter angles or special corner sections. 5. Size: Custom size as indicated on the Drawings. B. Corner pieces provide a support ledge for corner pieces and spacing of joints that easily lie up with standard 2 ft by 4 ft and 4 ft by 4 foot panels. C. Known Available Manufacturers: Provide metal panels by manufacturer meeting the requirements of this Section. Manufacturers include, but not limited to, the following: 1. BrickFast Panel; BrickFast. www.brickfastpanel.com 2. BrickIt; BrickIt. www.brickit.com 3. Tabs Way Systems; TABS II. www.tabswaysystems.com
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 5 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2.06 LATH AND COMPOUND MATERIALS A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; flat. 1. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq yd, minimum. B. Scratch and Leveling Compound: Latex portland cement mortar for thick beads, screeds, leveling beds, and scratch coats to be weather, frost, shock resistant, and meet the following physical properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi per ANSI A118.7. 2. Known Available Manufacturer: Laticrete Premium Mortar Bed, as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. or other manufacturer approved by Architect. Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. B. Air and Water Barrier: Single component, fluid applied, vapor permeable; waterproofing, crack isolation, and air barrier membrane. 1. Manufacturers: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier: www.laticrete.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. c. Refer also to Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers for other products and methods of installation. C. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant: One-component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant and meet the following requirements: 1. Tensile Strength: 280 psi per ASTM C794. 2. Hardness: 25 colored sealant or 15 clear sealant per ASTM D751; Shore A. 3. Weather Resistance (QUV Weatherometer): 10,000 hours no change. 4. Known Available Product: Laticrete Latasil as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Other products may be used as approved by Architect; refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. D. Organic Adhesive: Non-flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet the following physical requirements: 1. Open Time: 70 minutes at 75 degrees F. per ANSI A136.1. 2. Color: White 3. Density: 13.2 lbs/gal per ANSI A136.1. 4. Known Available Product: Laticrete 15 Premium Mastic as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Other products may be used as approved by Architect; refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. E. Epoxy Adhesive: Chemical resistant 100 percent solids epoxy with high temperature resistance, and meet the following minimum physical requirements per ANSI A118.3; 1. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi. 2. Shear Bond Strength: 1,250 psi. 3. Thermal Shock Resistance: 600 psi. 4. Tensile Strength: 1,400 psi. 5. Shrinkage: Zero to 0.1 percent.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 6 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
6. Known Available Product: Latapoxy 300 Adhesive as manufactured by Laticrete International Inc. Other manufacturers may be considered by Architect; refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive thin brick veneer. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for installation of thin brick veneer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Exterior Applications: Comply with TCNA (HB) Methods W244 and W201. B. Lath and Plaster Method Installation: Install cleavage membrane/water resistive barrier complying with current version of ASTM D226/D226M (No. 15 Type 1) 2 separate layers of cleavage membrane barrier complying with ICC-ES AC38 or a combination of both using corrosion resistant fasteners complying with ASTM C1063 Sec. 7.10.2. Install metal lath complying with the local building code requirements and current revision of ANSI A108.1a. Apply latex-portland cement mortar as scratch/leveling coat over wire lath, concrete masonry units in compliance with current revision of Masonry Veneer Manufacturer's Association (MVMA) "Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer" and veneer thin brick manufacturer's specific written installation instructions. Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true, and allow mortar to set until firm. 1. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. 2. Attach metal lath to concrete masonry using wire hair pins. Attach anchors to backup surface; space at maximum 24 inches on center. C. Cementitious Backer Unit (CBU) Over Steel Framing: Designs, specifications, and construction practices shall be in accordance with industry standards. Do not begin installation of thin brick unless the framing and cement board are property installed. 1. Tape all board joints with alkali resistant 2-inch wide reinforcing mesh provided by the cement backer board manufacturer. 2. Fill all substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints to a smooth finish using latex-fortified thin-set. Allow pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. 3. Thin-Bed Method: Install latex portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.1a. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the brick. Work the latex portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex portland cement mortar from brick face and joints between pieces. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL WALL PANEL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions as applicable to each type of substrate required. Install bricks to specified pattern and mortar.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 7 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Metal Grid: Apply to substrate surface in the true level rows, interlock at every panel. Install such that panel does not extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) below the face of the brick. 1. Offset vertical grid joints and leave 1/4 inch (6 mm) between joints. Install for brick to extend past grid by 1/2 inch (13 mm) at grid ends. 2. Fasten grid system to a sound substrate or wall with a non-corrosive fastener; minimum penetration of substrate is 1 inch (25 mm). Concrete and masonry walls require fasteners and adhesive on rear of metal grid. 3. Install fasteners on an average of 3 per square foot (0.1 square meters) and at top and bottom courses vertically and a maximum of 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Refer to Drawings. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. B. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove and replace. D. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.06 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 3.07 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Form joints as detailed on drawings or required by code; refer to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Substrate joints shall carry through, full width, to surface of brick. Install expansion joints in thin brick over construction/cold joints or control joints in substrates. C. Install expansion joints where thin brick abut restraining surfaces, such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns, changes in plane and corners. D. Use caulking gun or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. E. Joint Width: Greater than 1/8 inch and less than 1-inch. F. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces such as dirt, dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers, and old sealant/backer. Install appropriate backing material, closed cell backer rod, based on expansion joint design and as recommended by manufacturer of control and expansion joint materials.
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 8 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
G. Tool surface to a smooth finish. 3.08 GROUTING A. Allow thin brick to cure a minimum of 24 hours at 70 degrees F. Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris, or spacers. Sponge or wipe dust and dirt off veneer face and remove water standing in joints. Surface temperature shall be between 40 and 90 degrees F. Place water in a clean mixing container and add mortar slowly. Mix with a slow speed mixer to a smooth stiff consistency. Allow mortar to slake for 5 minutes. Remix mortar. Pointing grout may be installed using a grout bag, filling the joints to the desired depth, ensuring the grout is forced into all voids. Once applied allow to firm to "thumbprint" hardness, trowel, rake and/or dry, soft bristle brush to the desired finish. B. Use color grout at areas indicated on Drawings. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 3.11 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 9 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
04 26 16 - ADHERED MASONRY VENEER Page 10 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. B. Prefabricated ladders for access to roof hatch. C. Metal channel for attaching exterior panels and brick. D. Shop fabricated metal for Canopy No. 4. E. Metal Composite Material (MCM) specified in this Section may also be called in the Industry as Aluminum Composite Material (ACM), Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP), Metal Composite Panel (MCP), or Sandwich Panel. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). B. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2015. C. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008. D. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2016a. E. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. G. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013. H. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014. I. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014. J. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2015. K. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. L. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. M. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. N. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014.
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
O. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes; 2012. P. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes (Metric); 2012. Q. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012. R. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012. S. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. T. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films; 2007 (Reapproved 2015). U. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 2016. V. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 2014. W. ASTM E488/E488M - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015. X. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a. Y. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. Z. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). AA. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; 2008. AB. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2015. AC. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. AD. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). AE. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). AF. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. 1. Differentiate between shop and field fabrication. 2. Indicate substrates and adjacent work with which the fabrications must be coordinated. 3. Include large-scale details of anchorages and connecting elements.
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 2 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. Product Data - Metal Composite Material (MCM) Sheets: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including thickness, physical characteristics, and finish, and: 1. Finish manufacturer's data sheet showing physical and performance characteristics. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Fabrication instructions and recommendations. 4. Specimen warranty for finish, as specified herein. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. F. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design canopy system (C-4 on Drawings) under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating products specified in this section. 1. With not less than three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production. 2. Package for protection against transportation damage. 3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings. 4. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage. B. Store products protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Store in well ventilated space out of direct sunlight. 2. Protect from moisture and condensation with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight covering installed to provide ventilation. 3. Store at a slope to ensure positive drainage of any accumulated water. 4. Do not store in any enclosed space where ambient temperature can exceed 120 degrees F. 5. Avoid contact with any other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. MCM Sheet Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty stating that the finish will perform as follows for minimum of 5 years:
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 3 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Chalking: No more than that represented by a No.8 rating based on ASTM D4214. 2. Color Retention: No fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter color difference units, calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244. 3. Gloss Retention: Minimum of 30 percent gloss retention, when tested in accordance with ASTM D523. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33. E. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, plain. G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper. C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. D. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M), 6061 alloy, T6 temper. E. Aluminum Channel: ASTM B211, T5 for channel siderail at ladder. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded. 2.03 FORMED METAL FABRICATIONS - MCM SHEET A. MCM Sheet Fabrications, General: Assemble metal panels, fasteners, and anchors in configurations and dimensions shown on the drawings. 1. Provide panel jointing using fabricators recommended method for exterior horizontal application. 2. Anchor panels to supporting framing without exposed fasteners. 3. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with, and complying with acceptance criteria of NFPA 285. B. Panels: One inch deep pans formed of metal composite material sheet by routing back edges of sheet, removing corners, and folding edges. Aluminum composite panels consist of .020″ aluminum skins and a polyethylene (PE) core; fire rated core for instances where fire rated product is a concern. Aluminum composite finishes shall be PVDF (Kynar) finishes with metallic painted options that specifically mimic anodized finishes, or clear anodized finish.
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 4 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1. Reinforce corners with riveted aluminum angles. 2. Provide concealed attachment to supporting structure by adhering attachment members to back of panel; attachment members may also function as stiffeners. 3. Maintain maximum panel bow of 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width and length; provide stiffeners of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness without showing local stresses or read-through on panel face. 4. Reinforce panels over 48 inches long with metal angle braces 24 inches on center in short direction. 5. Secure members to back face of panels using structural silicone sealant approved by MCM sheet manufacturer. 6. Metallic Finished Panels: Maintain consistent grain of MCM sheet; specifically, do not rotate sheet purely to avoid waste. 7. Fabricate panels under controlled shop conditions. 8. Where final dimensions cannot be established by field measurement before commencement of manufacturing, make allowance for field adjustments without requiring field fabrication of panels. 9. Fabricate as indicated on drawings and as recommended by MCM sheet manufacturer. a. Make panel lines, breaks, curves and angles sharp and true. b. Keep plane surfaces free from warp or buckle. c. Keep panel surfaces free of scratches or marks caused during fabrication. C. Manufacturers: 1. Alucobond Panels - 3A Composites. 2. Reynobond Panels - Arconic (Formerly Alcoa Building Products). 3. Dibond Panels - 3A Composites - Primarily for signage applications. 4. Alpolic Panels - Mitsubishi Plastics, Inc. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.05 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Steel Framing and Supports, General: Fabricate units from steel shapes and plates of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 5 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. B. Downspout Guards: Fabricate downspouts guards from 3/8-inch by 12-inch wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall at both ends and to fit around downspout with 2-inch clearance between downspout and guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts. Galvanize guards; prime paint finish. C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. D. Slotted Channel Framing: Fabricate channels and fittings from structural steel complying with the referenced standards; factory-applied, rust-inhibiting thermoset acrylic enamel finish. 2.06 PREFABRICATED LADDERS A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. 2. Materials: Aluminum; ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T52 temper. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodized coating, comply with AAMA 611, Class 1. 4. Manufacturers: a. O'Keeffe's Inc: www.okeeffes.com/sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.07 CANOPY FABRICATION A. Canopy C-4 identified on Drawing A680. B. Outriggers: Galvanized sheet steel, field painted with color approved by Architect, to support aluminum canopy. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 3. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 4. Provide gaskets where required for continuous seal at adjacent surfaces. 5. Fabricate units from steel shapes and plates of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction and canopy. 6. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. 7. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 8. Finish: Field prime and paint using Architect's choice of color submittal by color sample. 9. Fabricators: Known Available Fabricators include but are not limited to the following:
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 6 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
a. BTEC Manufacturing Solutions; www.btecsolutions.com b. Metal Fab Engineering; metalfabengineering.com c. MetalWerks; metalwerksusa.com C. Canopy: Provide MCM canopies identified on drawings and in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 1. Concealed fasteners when possible. 2. Drill and tap holes for securing to other surfaces. 3. Provide gaskets where indicated or needed for continuous seal at adjacent surfaces. 4. Form tight joints; miter or cope corners. Reinforce where indicated on Shop Drawings. 5. Thickness: 4 mm minimum thickness. 6. Finish; Canopy finish shall be as approved by Architect's sample submittal from maufacturer's standard colors. 7. Fabricators: Known Available Fabricators include but are not limited to the following: a. CEI Materials; ceicomposites.com b. Fairfield Metal, LLC; fairfieldmetal.com c. H & H Metals; h-hmetals.com d. Precision Walls, LLC; precisionwalls.com D. Fasteners: Provide galvanized bolts, anchors, and other fasteners for complete installation of outrigger to the building and canopy attachment. All exposed fasteners shall be field painted to match outriggers. 1. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated or required, flat washers. 2. Anchors: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. Fasteners, MCM Panels: a. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel; permitted only where absolutely unavoidable and subject to prior approval of the Architect. b. Screws: Self-drilling or self-tapping ASTM A276/A276M, Type 410 stainless steel or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. c. Bolts: Stainless steel. 2.08 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be imbedded in masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat.
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 7 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.09 FINISHES - ALUMINUM A. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized. B. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. C. Pigmented Organic Coating System: AAMA 2603 polyester or acrylic baked enamel finish; color as indicated. D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 2.10 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 1. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts and other connectors
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 8 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.04 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturer's written instructions and requirements indicated on shop drawings. 3.05 INSTALLATION - MCM FABRICATIONS A. Do not install products that are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, and broken members, and members with damaged finishes. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of MCM sheet manufacturer and fabricator, and with approved shop drawings. C. Install securely allowing for necessary thermal and structural movement; comply with fabricator's instructions for installation of concealed fasteners. D. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish, decreases strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts. E. Do not form panels in field unless required by fabricator and approved by the Architect; comply with MCM sheet manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for field forming. F. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation tape where needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals. G. Where joints are designed for field applied sealant, seal joints completely with specified sealant. H. Install square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections, maintaining the following installation tolerances: 1. Variation From Plane or Location: 1/2 inch in 30 feet of length and up to 3/4 inch in 300 feet, maximum. 2. Deviation of Vertical Member From True Line: 1/8 inch in 25 feet run, maximum. 3. Deviation of Horizontal Member From True Line: 1/8 inch in 25 feet run, maximum. 4. Offset From True Alignment Between Two Adjacent Members Abutting End To End, In Line: 1/32 inch, maximum. I. Replace damaged products. 1. Exception: Field repairs of minor damage to finishes are permitted only when approved in writing by Architect, panel manufacturer, and fabricator. 2. Field Repairs to Finishes: Using materials and methods sufficient that repairs are not discernible when viewed at distance of 10 feet under typical light conditions experienced at project. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 9 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 10 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stairs with concrete treads. B. Handrails. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring for stair stringers and risers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. C. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2016. D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. G. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. H. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013. I. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. J. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014. K. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. L. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). M. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. N. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). O. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015. P. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings. C. Welders' Certificates. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. B. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. C. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. A company specializing in fabricating products specified in this section, with not less than five years minimum of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Prefabricated Metal Stairs: 1. Alfab; StairCo. 2. American Stairs. 3. Lapeyre Stair, Inc: www.lapeyrestair.com. 4. Pacific Stair Corporation: www.pacificstair.com. 5. Southern Staircase - An Artistic Stairs Company. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents. 2. Handrails: Comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ADA Standards. 3. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code. 4. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
5. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport and access to site. 6. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 7. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape. B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical; underside of stair not covered by soffit is considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded smooth and flush. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush. c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline. d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts. e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte finish. C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level. D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required. 2.03 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above. B. Risers: Closed. C. Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill. 1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches, minimum. 2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet. 3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch minimum. 4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Welded or bolted to carrier angles welded or bolted to stringers. 5. Concrete Reinforcement: Welded wire mesh. 6. Concrete Finish: Steel troweled. D. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans. 1. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius. 2. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch overhang. 3. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch wide. E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1. Stringer Depth: 12 inches. 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends. F. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design load capacity. G. Railings: Steel pipe railings.
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
H. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication, except sheet components to be galvanized before fabrication. 2.04 PREFABRICATED STAIRS A. Prefabricated Egress Stairs: Welded steel unit, factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Design Requirements: Comply with structural design criteria stated elsewhere in this section, the applicable requirements of ASTM E985. a. Comply with ADA Standards. b. Comply with applicable sections of the IBC. 2. Materials: Manufacturer's standard steel tubes, plates, bars, shapes, sheets, wire and mesh complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. a. Rails: Manufacturer's standard rails. 1) Guardrails: 42 inches high. 2) Handrails: 30 inches to 38 inches high. 3) Infill: Manufacturer's standard pickets. b. Treads: Manufacturer's standard concrete pan. c. Finish: Red oxide primer; manufacturer's standard. 2.05 HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND INTERMEDIATE RAILS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B. Distributed Loads: Design handrails, guards and attachments to resist a linear load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. C. Concentrated Loads: Design handrails, guards and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. D. Concentrated Loads at Intermediate Rails: Design intermediate rails (all those except the handrail), balusters and panel fillers to resist a concentrated force of 50 pounds, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. E. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. F. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round. 2. Intermediate Rails: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round. 3. Posts: 1-1/2 inches diameter, round. G. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors.
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry, for bolting anchors. H. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.06 HANDRAILS A. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. B. Guards: 1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. 2. Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair. a. Outside Diameter: 1 inch. b. Material: Steel pipe or tube, round. c. Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches on center. d. Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush. 3. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails. a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings. b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer. 2.07 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501/A501M structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated. C. Steel Plates: ASTM A6/A6M or ASTM A283/A283M. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230 with G40/Z120 coating. F. Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 psi 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch slump. G. Concrete Reinforcement: Mesh type, galvanized. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize to minimum requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Touch up abraded areas after fabrication using specified touch-up primer for galvanized surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3.02 PREPARATION A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION
05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 05 52 13 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Handrails and guards; refer to Building "G" Drawings for locations at grade and at second story doors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for delegated design. B. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. AISC 201 - AISC Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators, Standard for Steel Building Structures; 2006. C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. F. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. G. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2013. H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. A qualified steel fabricator that is certified by the American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC) under AISC 201. 2. A company specializing in fabricating products specified in this section, with not less than five years minimum of documented experience.
05 52 13 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND INTERMEDIATE RAILS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, to design handrails, guards, railings and attachments to building construction. B. Linear Loads: Design handrails, guards and attachments to resist a linear load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. C. Concentrated Loads: Design handrails, guards and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. D. Concentrated Loads at Intermediate Rails: Design intermediate rails (all those except the handrail), balusters and panel fillers to resist a concentrated force of 50 pounds, without damage or permanent set; design in accordance with the minimum requirements of Section 4.5.1 of ASCE 7. E. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. F. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. G. Guards: 1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. 2. Infill at Picket Railings: Horizontal pickets; match top rails. a. Horizontal Spacing: Maximum 4 inches on center. b. Material: Solid steel bar. c. Shape: Round. d. Top Mounting: Welded to underside of top rail. e. Bottom Mounting: As indicated on drawings. 3. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails. a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings. H. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. I. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors. 2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry, for bolting anchors. J. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
05 52 13 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. C. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. E. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 2. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be installed with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Install railings in compliance with ADA Standards for accessible design at applicable locations. D. Anchor railings securely to structure. E. Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. F. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.
05 52 13 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION
05 52 13 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 05 59 13 METAL BALCONIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated metal balconies with railings and platform. B. Drawings indicate the size and aesthetic requirements. Fabricator shall provide design calculations and shop drawings for the metal balconies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings, progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination. B. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing, inspection, mock-ups, reports, certificates; use of reference standards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016. B. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. C. ASTM A29/A29M - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon Alloy, Hot-Wrought, General Requirements; 2015. D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. E. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). F. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. H. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel; 2013. I. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2015. J. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. K. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2015. L. ASTM F1267 - Standard Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel; 2015. M. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs; 2013a. N. ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts; 2009 (Reapproved 2015).
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
O. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015. P. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2016. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. B. Verify the walls where balconies are to be installed are ready and all exterior finishes have been installed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Provided b the fabricator and signed by engineer. Show how balcony units will be installed to walls. C. Samples: Provide color samples for finish paint for the balconies. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator shall have a minimum of 3 years fabricating balconies specified in this Section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pre-fabricated and ready-to-install balconies; verify that equipment to lift balconies into place is available prior to shipping to jobsite. Cover and protect balconies from scratches during delivery, storage, and installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Fabricator shall provide 25 year warranty for balconies; 5 year warranty for finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings and platform to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, and platform shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Load Rating: Design for 130 lb live load (people) per square foot, which is a number three times bigger than the actual weight of people. This accounts for the bolting provided and its capacity, and the fact that the iron balcony is a solid rigid structure. These values are meant to be used to design the wall where balcony will be installed. Design size and live load calculations shall be minimum. 1. Size 67 by 24 inch Platform: 1,452 lb live load. 2. Size 80 by 24 inch Platform: 1,734 lb live load. 3. Size 80 by 36 inch Platform: 2,600 lb live load. 4. Size 80 by 48 inch Platform: 3,467 lb live load. 5. Size 102 by 36 inch Platform: 3,825 lb live load. 6. Size 102 by 48 inch Platform: 4,420 lb live load. E. Actual Load for Balcony: Actual Load the balcony is going to receive is based on occupancy and 200 lb. per person and 100 lbs for a child: 1. 67 by 24 inch Platform: 2.5 people; 500 lbs. 2. 80 by 24 inch Platform: 3 people; 600 lbs. 3. 80 by 36 inch Platform: 4.5 people; 900 lbs. 4. 80 by 48 inch Platform: 5.5 people; 1100 lbs. 5. 102 by 36 inch Platform: 5.5 people; 1,100 lbs. 6. 102 by 48 inch Platform: 8 people; 1600 lbs. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.02 FABRICATOR A. Known Available Fabricator: Designer and fabricator that meets the requirements of this Section: 1. Deciron, the Balcony Company. 6010 McDaniel Lane, Charlotte, NC. Phone: 704.750.0444. www.deciron.com. 2.03 STEEL AND IRON A. Fabricator may use the following materials for railings and platform. Refer to Engineer of Record design and approved Shop Drawings. 1. Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M(cold formed) or ASTM A513/A513M. 2. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A29/A29M, Grade 1010.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 4. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M unless otherwise indicated. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F1267, Type I (expanded) or Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated). a. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13. 6. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel Type B, with 0.060 inch thick, with 1/4-inch holes 3/8 inch o.c. in staggered rows. 7. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating, commercial steel Type B, with the following pattern: a. Pattern: 0.064 inch (1.63 mm) thick, with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) holes 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) o.c. in staggered rows. b. Pattern: 1/8-by-1-inch (3.2-by-25.4-mm) round end slotted holes in staggered rows. 8. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond pattern, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A510/A510M. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Delegated Design: Designer shall include types and sizes of fasteners for balconies for this Project. Refer to approved Shop Drawings. B. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Components:Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed. 4. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 5. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. C. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. D. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated or exposed fasteners are unavoidable. Provide exposed fasteners if the fabricator uses as the standard fastening method for railings and platforms. 1. Provide phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 for mechanical anchors or ICC-ES AC308 for adhesive anchors. F. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate balcony railings and platforms to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble balconies in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate balconies with welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint. I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. J. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2.06 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.07 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, but galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with either SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. G. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat nongalvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. 2. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing balconies. Set balconies accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and copper alloys that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust balconies before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing balconies and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to balcony railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of balcony railings. B. Attach balconies to walls with wall fasteners in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. Locate fasteners as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Locate bolts and other fasteners as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Provide fabricator's field representative to inspect balconies. END OF DOCUMENT
05 59 13 - METAL BALCONIES Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural timber framing; exterior. B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. C. Sheathing. D. Underlayment. E. Roof-mounted curbs. F. Roofing nailers. G. Roofing cant strips. H. Preservative treated wood materials. I. Fire retardant treated wood materials. J. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. K. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. L. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Air barrier and weather-resistant barrier over sheathing. B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings. C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based cementitious sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2013a. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. D. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. E. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010. F. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2016. I. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
J. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015. L. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on sheathing and architectural timber framing. 1. Provide certificate stating the method and products used for Fire-Retardant-Treatment on products. C. Samples: Provide color and grain samples for the timber beams and columns. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Shop Drawings: Fabricator of the architectural wood beams shall provide shop drawings indicating the grade/species, dimensions, methods of attachment, and location of each beam and bolts design for attachment for each substrate type. Shop drawings shall be signed by manufacturer and fabricator. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer: Manufacturer and installer for the architectural timbers shall design, manufacture/fabricate, and install per approved Shop Drawings. Manufacturer/Installer shall have a minimum of 3 years experience designing, fabricating, and installing timbers similar to size and scope of this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for architectural timber framing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL TIMBER FRAMING A. For beams and columns indicated for exterior architectural detail on Drawings. B. Provide timber framing as follows 1. Species: Pine, Southern. a. Longleaf. b. Loblolly. c. Shortleaf. d. Slash. 2. Grade: Determined by Design/Manufacturer of timber beams and posts. 3. Surface Texture: Determined by Design/Manufacturer. 4. Color: Refer to approved sample submittal. 5. Finish: Refer to approved sample submittal. C. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel 304 series lag screws, bolts, screws, hangers, and straps. 1. Lag screws are commonly used to fasten one member to a thicker member where a through bolt cannot be used. Pilot holes must be drilled for lag screws, and the screw must be fully inserted to be effective. For softwood species and outdoor structures, drill pilot holes 60 to 70 percent of the diameter of the screw for threaded portion, and the full diameter for unthreaded shank. Ensure lag screw is long enough so that at least half of its length penetrates the thicker member. 2. Bolts offer more rigidity and typically more load-carrying capacity than lag screws; however, their use is obviously limited to situations where a hole can be drilled completely through the members to be connected. Holes drilled for bolts should be no more than 1/16 inch larger in diameter than the size of the bolt used. Machine bolts should be used; do not use carriage bolts. Dome-head bolts, typically used in heavy timber construction, are also acceptable. 3. Use washers with lag screws and under both the head of the bolt and nut to distribute the bolt force over a larger area and limit crushing of the wood. 4. After drilling holes for fasteners, it is important to immediately saturate the holes with a preservative, such as copper naphthenate. D. Known Available Fabricators and Installers: The following designers, fabricators, and installers can perform the Scope of Work of this Section:
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Carolina Timberworks, 1172 Highland Hall Road, Boone, NC 28607; www.carolinatimberworks.com 2. More Sun, 463 Charlie Cobb Road, Mountain Rest, SC; www.moresunwoodworking.com 3. Timberframe Horizons, LLC, 1132 Old Fort Road, Fairview, NC 28730; www.timberframehorizons.com 2.04 TIMBERS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry (23 percent maximum). C. Beams and Posts 5 inches and over in thickness: 1. Grade: Select Structural. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Underlayment: APA Underlayment; plywood, Exposure 2, 1/2 inch thick. B. Roof Sheathing: Any PS 2 type, rated Structural I Sheathing. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 60. 3. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT. C. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2. 1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing. 2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1. 3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT. 4. Span Rating: 40/20. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption from exposure to weather for up to 500 days. 7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener spacing for 16 inches and 24 inches on center, respectively. D. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I. E. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, 5/8 inch Type X fire resistant. 1. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Glass Mat Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand: www.certainteed.com. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing: www.gpgypsum.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. F. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. G. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M. C. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. D. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 62 00. E. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 27 00. 2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground. 2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal. B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.04 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Screw to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing.
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. C. Exterior Wall Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing horizontally and staggered with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Install the boards with nails, screws, or staples 2. Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant. D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. 3.08 CLEANING A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 06 20 23.10 INTERIOR WOOD CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior running trim. B. Caps for interior gypsum walls that are 3-feet-6-inches tall. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. B. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting for baseboard painting and stain on wood caps. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data sheets for all wood trim units showing profiles. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate using drawing or photograph the details for the caps that will be installed on the half-walls. D. Samples: Submit two baseboard samples, height by 8 inch in size and two samples of cap, illustrating profile and finish. Provide sample of finish on the wood for the cap to show color and grain of the wood after application of stain. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD RUNNING TRIM A. Base Board: Provide minimum 9/16-inch thick baseboard in heights and profiles indicated on Drawings. Paint-grade finish; pre-primed. Finger-jointed trim is acceptable. B. Quater-Round: Trim that is pre-primed; 1-1/6 inch high pine, if used. 2.02 WOOD CAPS FOR PARTIAL HEIGHT WALLS A. Provide white ash or other hardwood approved by Architect that will produce even stain with color selected. Finish cap piece on top of the half-walls with 3-dimensional trim along sides and bottom edge. Refer to approved Shop Drawing for details. B. Provide adnesive to set caps and finishing nails for secure fit. Apply sealant at joints. C. Refer to Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting for stain. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Provide finish nails; length adequate to secure trim.. B. Adhesive: For securing cap piece to the top of the half-wall.. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
06 20 23.10 - INTERIOR WOOD CARPENTRY Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that walls are ready to receive baseboard and wall caps.. Verify the doors and windows have been properly installed prior to installation of wood trim. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and accepted installation practices. B. Apply sealants at joints where baseboard meets wall and where the joints at wall caps. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wall base and wall caps from subsequent construction operations. END OF DOCUMENT
06 20 23.10 - INTERIOR WOOD CARPENTRY Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction and exterior wall behind indicated wall finish. B. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction. C. Batt insulation in interior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Air barriers B. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013. B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014. C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. D. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2016. E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. F. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2016. G. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type I, aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core. 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class B - 26 to 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Complies with fire resistance requirements shown on the drawings as part of an exterior non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 4. Compressive Strength: 16 psi 5. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch. 6. Board Thickness: 3.5 inch at roof; refer to Drawings for other locations. 7. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 5.5 per 1 inch minimum. 8. Board Edges: Square. 9. Manufacturer: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; ACFoam-II Polyiso Roof Insulation: www.atlasroofing.com/#sle. b. Dow Chemical Company; THERMAX XARMOR (ci): www.dow.com/#sle. c. GAF; EnergyGuard Polyiso Insulation: www.gaf.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid or semi-rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C612 or ASTM C553; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Board Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Maximum Density: 4.5 pounds per cubic foot, nominal. 4. Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning Corporation; Thermafiber RainBarrier 45: www.ocbuildingspec.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option. B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
5. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 19.0. 6. Facing: Unfaced. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. d. Substitutions:See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures . C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 7.5 minimum. 4. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com/#sle. b. ROXUL, Inc; COMFORTBATT: www.roxul.com/#sle. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive. 1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables. 2. Width: Are required for application. 3. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F to 212 degrees F B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be mechanically fastened to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. 2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick. B. Install boards vertically on walls. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. D. Tape insulation board joints.
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at following frequency: 1. Six (6) per insulation board. B. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. 2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick. C. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. 1. Place membrane surface against adhesive. D. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. 4. Place impale fastener locking discs. E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. F. Place 6 inch wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frames, and tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK A. Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General: 1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements. 2. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day. 3.05 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide supplementary support when insulation does not fill cavity or one side of cavity is left open and partition is 8 feet or higher. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. F. Retain insulation batts in place with spindle fasteners at 16 inches on center. G. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. H. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07 27 00. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 26 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade. B. Sheet vapor barrier shall continue over the leave-out location indicated on Drawings. Protect this area from damage during construction activities. C. This Section supercedes products specified on Structural Drawings if listed. D. Coordinate with specifications for concrete found on the Structural Drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 15 16 - WATERPROOF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. B. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming, penetration prevention and repair, and perimeter seal per ASTM E1643. Indicate details for interfacing adjacent construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum. 2. Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A. 3. Thickness: 15 mils. 4. Basis of Design: a. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil): www.stegoindustries.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Seams: Manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier. B. Penetration Sealer: 1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC. 2. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC.
07 26 16 - UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS Page 1 of 2 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Penetration / Edge Seal: 1. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC, 2. Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC 3. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before proceeding with installation of vapor barrier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. C. Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall, grade beam, or slab at an elevation consistent with the top of the slab or terminate at impediments such as waterstops or dowels. . D. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. E. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. F. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. G. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials. END OF SECTION
07 26 16 - UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS Page 2 of 2 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 27 00 AIR BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid-applied, vapor permeable, water-resistive air barriers. B. Air barrier accessories. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. B. Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2015a). B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2015a. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016. E. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013. F. ICC-ES AC148 - Acceptance Criteria for Flexible Flashing Materials; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2011. G. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product data including material characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation methods. E. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed manufacturer and materials. F. ABAA Installer Qualification: Submit documentation of current contractor accreditation and current installer certification. Keep copies of all contractor
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
accreditation and installer certification on site during and after installation. Present on-site documentation upon request. G. Testing Agency Qualification Statement. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP); www.airbarrier.org/#sle: 1. Installer Qualification: Use accredited contractor, certified installers, evaluated materials, and third-party field quality control audit. 2. Manufacturer Qualification: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in air barrier material manufacture. Use secondary materials approved in writing by primary material manufacturer. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUID-APPLIED AIR BARRIERS A. Air Barrier, Fluid Applied: Vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing; typical over substrates, unless noted otherwise. 1. Air Barrier Coating: a. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without requiring a primer. b. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due to delamination of sheathing. c. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): 10 mils (0.010 inch), minimum. d. Air Permeance: 0.001 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. e. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure B. f. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 6 months weather exposure after application. g. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. h. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. i. Fire Testing: No increase in fire hazard; passes. j. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970/D1970M. k. VOC Content: 100 g per L or less. l. Code Acceptance: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC212. m. Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by coating manufacturer. n. Products:
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1) Basis of Design: Sto Corp; Sto EmeraldCoat: www.stocorp.com/#sle. 2) Master Wall, Inc; Rollershield LAB System: www.masterwall.com/#sle. 3) PROSOCO, Inc; R-GUARD Cat 5: www.prosoco.com/r-guard/#sle. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2. Air Barrier Membrane: a. Material: Water-based acrylic. b. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without requiring a primer. c. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due to delamination of sheathing. d. Dry Film Thickness: 30 mils (0.030 inch), minimum. e. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. f. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure B. g. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 3 months weather exposure. h. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. i. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. j. Nail Sealability: Pass, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1970/D1970M. k. Products: 1) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 33MR: www.henry.com/#sle. 2) Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; ExoAir 230: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 3) W.R. Meadows, Inc; Air-Shield LMP: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories for Sealing Air Barrier and Sealing Air Barrier to Adjacent Substrates: As specified or as recommended by air barrier manufacturer. B. Flexible Flashing: Sheathing fabric saturated with air barrier coating and complying with the applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC148. C. Liquid Flashing: One part, fast curing, non-sag, elastomeric, gun grade, trowelable liquid flashing. D. Liquid Flashing: One part, fast curing, non-sag, gun grade, trowelable liquid flashing. 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 778 Liquid Flashing: www.dowcorning.com/construction/#sle. b. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc/GE Construction Sealants; GE SCS2000 SilPruf: www.siliconeforbuilding.com/#sle.
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
c. Parex USA, Inc; Parex USA WeatherTECH with WeatherFlash: www.parexusa.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. E. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive air barriers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. D. Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before installing weather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight. 3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints. E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Air Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto air barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal air barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under air barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal air barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to air barrier surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Coordination of ABAA Tests and Inspections:
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1. Provide testing and inspection required by ABAA QAP. 2. Notify in ABAA writing of schedule for air barrier work. Allow adequate time for testing and inspection. 3. Cooperate with ABAA testing agency. 4. Allow access to air barrier work areas and staging. 5. Do not cover air barrier work until tested, inspected, and accepted. C. Do not cover installed air barriers until required inspections have been completed. D. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the air barrier manufacturer based on a mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation. E. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 27 00 - AIR BARRIERS Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural roofing system of preformed steel panels. B. Attachment system. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. B. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015). C. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. D. ASTM E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005 (Reapproved 2012). E. ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2011). F. IAS AC472 - Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems; 2012. G. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. 2. Include structural analysis signed and sealed by qualified structural engineer, indicating conformance of roofing system to specified loading conditions. D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Manufacturer Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing metal roof panel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC472.
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
F. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of metal roofing system to specified requirements. G. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1. Accredited by IAS in accordance with IAS AC472. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation. B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of five years from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: MBCI; BattenLok HS. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers; Metal Roof Panels: 1. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com/#sle. 2. Metl-Span, a Division of NCI Group, Inc: www.metlspan.com. 3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; Snap-Clad Panel: www.pac-clad.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures . 2.02 STRUCTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS A. Structural Metal Roofing: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips, fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for conformance to the following minimum standards: 1. Structural Design Criteria: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed L/180 of span length(L) when tested in accordance with ASTM E1592. 2. Overall: Complete weathertight system tested and approved in accordance with ASTM E1592.
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Wind Uplift: Class 90 wind uplift resistance of UL 580. 4. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to procedures and recommended test pressures of ASTM E1646. Perform test immediately following air infiltration test. 5. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F. B. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish. 1. Type: Single skin, uninsulated. 2. Steel Panels: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated SS (structural steel) sheet conforming to ASTM A792/A792M; minimum AZ55 coating. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gage (0.024 inch). but not less than thickness required to meet performance requirements. 3. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 2.0 inch seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 4. Texture: Smooth with striations in pan. 5. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints. 6. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches. 2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.04 SECONDARY FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Secondary Framing: Light gage steel framing incidental to structural supports; fabricated from steel sheet. B. Framing Material: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation SS steel sheet. 1. Profile: Manufacturer's standard cee, zee, asymmetrical zee, hat channel, plain channel, single slope eave strut, double slope eave strut, and angle. 2. Thickness: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch. 3. Finish: Galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, G90. C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Panels: Provide factory or field fabricated panels with applied finish and accessory items, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. B. Joints: Provide captive gaskets, sealants, or separator strips at panel joints to ensure weathertight seals, eliminate metal-to-metal contact, and minimize noise from panel movements. 2.06 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer's standard multi-coat thermocured coating system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.7 -0.8 mil; color and gloss as selected from manufacturer’s standards. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, and caps of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. 1. Downspouts: Open face, rectangular profile. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam. C. Sealants: 1. Exposed Sealant: Elastomeric; silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane. 2. Concealed Sealant: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant. 3. Seam Sealant: Factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces. C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Install roofing felt and building paper slip sheet on roof deck before installing preformed metal roof panels. Secure by methods acceptable to roof panel manufacturer, minimizing use of metal fasteners. Apply from eaves to ridge in shingle fashion, overlapping horizontal joints a minimum of 2 inches and side and end laps a minimum of 3 inches. Offset seams in building paper and seams in roofing felt. D. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer92s instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. 1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer. 2. Install sealant or sealant tape, as recommended by panel manufacturer, at end laps and side joints. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 41 13 - METAL ROOF PANELS Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls and soffits, with related flashings and accessory components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures for submitting substitute manufacturers. B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation. C. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Weather barrier under wall panels. D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between metal wall panel system and adjacent construction. E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall panel substrate. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. C. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel, 24 inch by 24 inch in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products of the type specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off the ground and protected from weather; prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion; provide ventilation; slope metal sheets to ensure proper drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
07 42 13 - METAL WALL PANELS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. C. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion, including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Corrugated Metal Wall Panel: Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M, roll formed, with the following characteristics: 1. Material: 24 gage 55 percent Al-Zn alloy coated steel, ASTM A792/A792M; exposed fasteners. 2. Panel Width:37-1/2 inches minimum. 3. Panel Length:Cut to specifications with a minimum of 6’-0”, maximum to transportation limitations and/or product and project design considerations. 4. Panel Depth: 7/8-inch 5. Texture: Smooth. 6. Finish: Kynar 500® PVDF or Hylar 5000® PVDF; color selected by Architect. 7. Fasteners: Hex washer head with sealing washer made of EPDM or other material to prevent galvanic action and to seal against moisture entrusion. Fasteners shall receive coating same as the corrugated metal wall panels. B. Soffit Panels: 1. Profile: Style as indicated. 2. Material: Precoated steel sheet, 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum thickness. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. C. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. D. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, and Flashings: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. E. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS) or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating. B. Insulation: Glass fiber type specified in Section 07 21 00. 2.03 FINISHES A. Exposed Surface Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, top coat over epoxy primer. B. Panel Backside Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard siliconized polyester wash coat. C. Custom Fluoropolymer Coating System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat thermoplastic fluoropolymer coating system, including minimum 70 percent PVDF color topcoat and minimum total dry film thickness (DFT) of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as indicated on drawings.
07 42 13 - METAL WALL PANELS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1. Products: a. PPG Metal Coatings; Duranar: www.ppgmetalcoatings.com/#sle. b. Valspar Corporation; Fluropon: www.valsparinspireme.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant. B. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, steel, hot dip galvanized. Exposed fasteners same finish as panel system. 1. Metal-to-Metal Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws. D. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. 3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean prefinished aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. END OF SECTION
07 42 13 - METAL WALL PANELS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 42 13 - METAL WALL PANELS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 46 33 PLASTIC SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid phenolic cladding panel system and accessories as required for a complete drained and back-ventilated rainscreen system. 1. Wall panels. 2. Fascia. 3. Aluminum sub-frame and fasteners. B. No substitutions for manufacturer listed in this Section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation board applied over sheathing before siding installation. B. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Siding substrate. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2016. B. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics; 2016. C. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 2016. D. ASTM D2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity; 2015. E. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2014. F. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2016a. G. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. I. ISO 846 - Plastics - Evaluation of the Action of Microorganisms; 1997. J. NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2012. K. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Samples: Provide samples in colors specified, not less than 12 inches in length. D. Shop Drawings: Include sub-framing system; panel sizes and locations of installation; and details for fastening panels to sub-frame. E. Color Charts: Where colors are not specified, provide samples of manufacturer's entire color line for selection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Not less than three years of experience with products specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Trespa International as represented by Trespa North America, LTD; trespa.com/na 2.02 WALL PANELS A. Solid Phenolic Wall Panels: Trespa Pura NFC by Trespa International. 1. Material: Solid panel manufactured using a combination of high pressure and temperature to create a flat panel created from thermosetting resins, homogeneously reinforced with wood-based fibers and an integrated decorative surface or printed decor. 2. Color on Primary Face: Color as selected by Architect. 3. Finish: Satin Sheen. 4. Panel Core: Fire retardant (FR) black core. 5. Panel Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Physical Properties: Per EN 438.6 Standard. a. Modulus of Elasticity: 1,300,000 psi minimum. b. Tensile Strength: 10,100 psi minimum. c. Flexural Strength: 14,500 psi minimum d. Thermal Conductivity: 2.1 BTU/in/sq ft. hr, deg F. e. Structural Performance; ASTM E330/E330M. 1) Panels shall e designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon the local building code, but in no case less than 15 pounds per square foot (PSF). Wind load testing shall be done i accordance with the standard to obtain the following results: 2) Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/175. 3) Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the aluminum sub-framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
7. Fire Performance: a. Flame Spread: Class A, ASTM E84. b. Smoke Developed: Less than 450, ASTM E84. c. Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degrees F above ambient; ASTM D1929. d. Burning Classification: CC1 or CC2, ASTM D635. e. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding assembly shall sow no degradation of the rating of Fire Resistant Assemblies, ASTM E119. f. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding assembly including cladding and non-cladding elements such as, but not limited to, specific weather resistive barriers and/or exterior insulation materials, shall meet the performance requirements of NFPA 285. Performance shall be determined by actual testing in accordance with NFPA 285 or through an equivalency analysis provided by a recognized fire protection expert. g. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding assembly shall not ignite when exposed to a radiant heat energy source, NFPA 268. 8. Finish Performance: Electron Beam Cure resin in conformance with the following general requirements: a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors or a custom color to be matched y the panel supplier. b. Humidity Resistance: No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water fog at 100% relative humidity and 100 degrees F for 3000 hours, ASTM D2247. c. Salt Spray Resistance: Corrosion creepage from scribe line (1/16 inch maximum) and minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field, ASTM B117. d. Weather Exposure: Accelerated 3000 hours in Atlas Type Weatherometer using cycle of 90 minutes light and 30 minutes diminished light and demineralized water with a maximum color change of 5 Delta E units from the original color according to ASTM D2244. e. Microbial Characteristics: Will not support micro-organic growth; ISO 846. B. Mounting System: One or more of the following, based on exterior design criteria, as designed and manufactured by Monarch Metal Fabrications for Trespa: 1. TS110 - Exposed fastening on fixed depth aluminum sub-framing. 2. TS120 - Exposed fastening on variable depth aluminum sub-framing. 3. TS210 - Concealed fastening over fixed depth aluminum sub-framing. 4. TS220 - Concealed fastening over variable-depth aluminum sub-framing. 5. TS110-285 - Exposed fastening on fixed depth aluminum sub-framing tested and meeting the performance requirement of NFPA 285. 6. TS120-285 - Exposed fastening on variable depth aluminum sub-framing rested and meeting the performance requirements of NFPA 285. 7. TS210-285 - Concealed fastening over fixed depth aluminum sub-framing and meeting the performance requirements of NFPA 285. 8. TS220-285 - Concealed fastening over variable depth aluminum sub-framing tested and meeting the performance requirements of NFPA 285.
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
9. Other installation systems - include test documentation showing compliance with the performance criteria set forth in the specification and in accordance with the local building code. C. Aluminum Sub Structure: Aluminum sub-structure designed to withstand structural loading due to wind load and the dead load of the panel, painted as required to conceal behind the open joinery of the attachment system. 1. Extrusions, including corner closures, joint closures and vent screens, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with the recommendations of the manufacturer. D. Extruded Aluminum Trim Color: Refer to Finish Schedule. E. Fasteners (Concealed/Exposed): Fasteners shall be non-corrosive and as recommended by panel manufacturer. Exposed fasteners shall be colored to match panels where required by the Architect. F. Panel Corner Profile: Dimensions shall be 143.70 inches by 11.81 inches by 11.81 inches with a 5/16 inch thick by 3/4 inch radius. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Panels: Solid phenolic impregnated kraft paper wall panels with no voids, air spaces, or foamed insulation in the core materials. Accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals. B. Panel Weight: 1. 10 mm thickness: 3 lb/sq ft. C. Panel Bow: 0.079 inch/39.38 inches. D. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible. E. Appearance: Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and buckle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation; verify dimensions and acceptability of substrate. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC WALL PANELS A. Install solid phenolic wall panels and sub-frame system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install solid phenolic wall panels plumb and level and accurately spaced in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations and approved submittals and drawings. C. Anchor panels and sub-framing securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary movement and structural support. D. Fasten solid phenolic wall panels with fasteners approved for use with supporting substrate. E. Do not install panels or component parts which are observed to be defective or damaged including, but not limited to: warped, bowed, abraded, scratched, and broken members. F. Do not cut or trim component parts during installation in a manner that would damage te finish, decrease the strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts with request for alteration to the shop for re-fabrication or replacement. G. Install corner profiles and trim with fasteners appropriate for use with adjoining construction as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove masking or panel protection as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the responsibility of the Contractor to remove. B. Adjust final panel installation so that all joints ar true and even throughout the installation. Panels out of plane shall be adjusted with the surrounding panels to minimize imperfections. C. Repair panels with minor damage. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of Contractor. D. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. After installation cleaning, cleaning during construction shall become the responsibility of Contractor. END OF SECTION
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 46 33 - PLASTIC SIDING Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood-fiber cement siding; two designs. B. Provide both types of panels by same manufacturer. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and fixtures. B. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns. C. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide thirty year manufacturer warranty for siding. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIDING A. Panel Siding: Horizontally oriented panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Length (Height): 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.
07 46 46 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Warranty: 30 year limited; transferable. 7. Panel Siding Manufacturers: a. Allura, a division of Plycem USA, Inc: www.allurausa.com. b. Basis-of-Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Panel Siding: Smooth, flat panels without horizontal or vertical orientation made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment; butt edge installation. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Length (Height): 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Warranty: 30 year limited; transferable. 7. Panel Siding Manufacturers: a. Allura, a division of Plycem USA, Inc: www.allurausa.com. b. Basis-of-Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Length: 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Panel Siding Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. b. Allura, a division of Plycem USA, Inc: www.allurausa.com. c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Furring Strips: Galvanized metal channels. B. Trim: Same material and texture as siding. C. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch. D. Sealant: Elastomeric, polyurethane or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane, and capable of being painted.
07 46 46 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation. B. Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install sheet metal flashing: 1. Above door and window trim and casings. 2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 3. Touch up all field cut edges before installing. 4. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. B. Over Foam Sheathing: Read and comply with sheathing manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For sheathing of 1 inch (25 mm) thickness or less, nail through sheathing into studs using correspondingly longer nails. C. Over Steel Studs: Use hot-dipped galvanized self-tapping screws, with the points of at least three screws penetrating each stud the panel crosses and at panel ends. D. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim; seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant. E. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install Z-flashing in horizontal joints between successive courses of vertical siding. F. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect. G. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges. H. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 91 13. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
07 46 46 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 46 46 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanically attached thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing membrane. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Vapor retarder. 1. Vapor retarder is seldom required in the three states of MPS offices, except in buildings with extraordinarily high humidity. Check with the mechanical engineer if in doubt. D. Deck sheathing. E. Flashings. F. Roofing cant strips and roofing expansion joints. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings and downspouts. B. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: Prefabricated roofing expansion joint flashing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. B. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2016. D. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2013. E. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. F. FM DS 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; Factory Mutual System; 2006. G. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual; 2017. H. UL 790 - Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's written information listed below.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 1 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Product data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, and paver layout. D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 8 by 8 inches in size illustrating insulation and colored coating. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G. Warranty: 1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with all warranty conditions for the waterproof membrane. H. Installer's Qualification Statement. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum twenty (20) years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: 1. With minimum five (5) years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install products from single source. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. D. Keep Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) at the project site at all times during transportation, storage, and installation of materials. E. Comply with all requirements of Owner to prevent overloading or disturbance of the structure when loading materials onto the roof. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. Refer to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 2 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
D. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic as work progresses. E. Do not allow grease, oil, fats, or other contaminants to come into direct contact with membrane. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that shows manufacturing defects within 10 years after installation. C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Include accidental punctures according to the manufacturer's standard warranty terms. 4. Include hail damage according to the manufacturer's standard warranty terms. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Sure-Weld Extra TPO. carlisle-syntec.com/sle. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ROOFING APPLICATIONS A. TPO Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, mechanically fastened, over insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Performance Requirements and Design Criteria: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): Minimum of 64 based on three-year aged value; if three-year aged data is not available, minimum of 82 initial value. a. Calculate SRI in accordance with ASTM E1980. b. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Roof Covering External Fire Resistance Classification: Class A when tested per UL 790. 3. Wind Uplift: a. Designed to withstand wind uplift forces calculated with ASCE 7. 4. Drainage: No standing water within 48 hours after precipitation. 2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 60 mils (0.060 inch), minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Color: White. 6. Product: a. Carlisle Sure-Weld EXTRA.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 3 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended and approved by membrane manufacturer. 1. HP-X Fastener: #15 threaded fastener with #3 Phillips drive. Use with Carlisle Piranha Fastening Plate for mechanically fastened membrane systems on steel or plywood decks. 2. HP-Xtra Fastener: Oversized, 0.315 inch, threaded steel fastener. Use with Piranha Xtra Plates to secure mechanically fastened membrane systems to steel or wood decks. 3. Piranha Plate: 2-3/8 inch diameter, barbed metal fastening plate. Use with Carlisle HP-X, CD-10 or HD 14-10 Fasteners to secure membrane or insulation in mechanically fastened membrane systems. D. Vapor Retarder: Material approved by roof manufacturer complying with requirements of fire rating classification; compatible with roofing and insulation materials. 1. Fire-retardant adhesive. E. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. F. Base Flashing: Provide waterproof, fully adhered base flashing system at all penetrations, plane transitions, and terminations. 2.04 DECK SHEATHING A. Deck Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C1177/C1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. 1. Product: GP Dens-Deck, distributed by Carlisle. B. Deck Sheathing: Polyisocyanurate foam plastic, complying with ASTM C1289; Type V, oriented strand board one face, glass fiber mat one face, Grade 2. 1. Top Layer Material: 7/16 inch (11 mm) oriented strand board (OSB). 2.05 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, fiber reinforced felt both faces; Grade 2 and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 pounds per square inch. 2. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 3 inch; fabricate of fewest layers possible. 3. Product: a. Carlisle HP-H. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Prefabricated Roofing Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet butyl over closed-cell foam backing seamed to galvanized steel flanges. B. Prefabricated Flashing Accessories: 1. Corners and Seams: Same material as membrane, in manufacturer's standard thicknesses. a. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Inside Corners; 60 mils (0.060 inch) thick. b. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Outside Corners; 60 mils (0.060 inch) thick. c. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO T-Joint Covers; 60 mils (0.060 inch) thick, 4-1/2 inch diameter.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 4 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
d. Carlisle TPO Curb Wrap Corners; 45 mils (0.045 inch) thick, 6 inch wide flange and 12 inch overall height. 2. Penetrations: Same material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard cut-outs, rigid inserts, clamping rings, and flanges. a. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Molded Pipe Flashings; for pipes 1 inch to 6 inches in diameter. b. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Split Pipe Seals; for pipes 1 inch to 6 inches in diameter. c. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Square Tubing Wraps. 3 inches, 4 inches, and 6 inches square. 3. Sealant Pockets: Same material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard accessories, in manufacturer's standard configuration. a. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Molded Sealant Pockets: Two piece, interlocking, flexible pockets with rigid polypropylene vertical wall and preformed deck flanges. 6 inches wide and adjustable from 7-1/2 inches to 12 inches long. b. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Prefabricated Sealant Pockets: Two piece, prefabricated, rigid; TPO and TPO-coated metal with weldable horizontal deck flange; 12 inch square. c. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO Sealant Pockets Extension Legs: 45 mils (0.045 inch) thick TPO membrane and TOP-coated metal; each unit extends length of Molded Sealant Pocket or Prefabricated Sealant Pocket by 10 inches. Use full length or cut to size. 4. Pressure Sensitive Cover Strips: 6 inch wide, 45 mils (0.045 inch) thick, non-reinforced TPO membrane laminated to 35 mils (0.035 inch) thick cured synthetic rubber with pressure sensitive adhesive. 5. TPO Pressure Sensitive RUSS: a. 10 inch wide, 45 mils (0.045 inch) thick, reinforced TPO membrane with 3 inch wide, 35 mils (0.035 inch) thick cured synthetic rubber with pressure sensitive adhesive laminated to one edge. 6. Walkway Rolls: Sure-Flex Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls; 60 mils thick by 3 feet wide; gray membrane for application at HVAC equipment. 7. Miscellaneous Flashing: Non-reinforced TPO membrane; 60 mills thick in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths. C. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering. D. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers. 2. HP-X Fastener: #15 threaded fastener with #3 Phillips drive. Use with Carlisle Piranha Fastening Plate for mechanically fastened membrane systems on steel or plywood decks. 3. HP-Xtra Fastener: Oversized, 0.315 inch, threaded steel fastener. Use with Piranha Xtra Plates to secure mechanically fastened membrane systems to steel or wood decks.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 5 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
4. Piranha Plate: 2-3/8 inch diameter, barbed metal fastening plate. Use with Carlisle HP-X, CD-10 or HD 14-10 Fasteners to secure membrane or insulation in mechanically fastened membrane systems. 5. InsulFast Fasteners: Threaded Phillips drive fastener. Use with Carlisle Insulation Plates for insulation attachment to steel or wood decks. 6. ASAP Fastener: Carlisle's InsulFAST Fastener pre-assembled with a 3 inch diameter plastic plate, for insulation attachment only. (Requires proprietary fastening tool by Olympic Fasteners.) E. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1. Carlisle Sure-Weld Bonding Adhesive. F. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives. G. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel, maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment flanges. H. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1. Sure-Weld Cut Edge Sealant. 2. Water Cut-Off Mastic. 3. Universal Single-Ply Sealant. 4. Thermoplastic, One-Part Pourable Sealant. I. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard, clear, solvent-based cleaner. 1. Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner. J. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended product. 1. Carlisle TPO Primer. 2. Carlisle 702 Primer (between vapor retarder and substrate). K. Edgings and Terminations: Manufacturer's standard edge and termination accessories. One or more of the following as required for roofing system to receive 20-year warranty. Color as selected by Architect. 1. Snap-On Edge System: a. SecurEdge 200. b. SecurEdge 300. c. SecurEdge 400. 2. Anchor Bar Fascia System: a. SecurEdge 1000. b. SecurEdge 2000. c. SecurEdge 3000. d. SecurEdge 4000. 3. Drip Edge: Carlisle Sure-Seal Drip Edge. 4. Coping: a. SecurEdge 200 Coping. b. SecurEdge 300 Coping. c. SecurEdge 400 Coping. 5. TPO Coated Sheet Metal. 6. Termination Bar. L. Pads for Roof Top Units (RTUs): Coordinate location with Mechanical; provide pads as recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. Pads shall not penetrate the roofing system.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 6 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. 3.02 PREPARATION, GENERAL A. Clean substrate thoroughly prior to roof application. B. Do not begin work until other work that requires foot or equipment traffic on roof is complete. C. Apply manufacturer's recommended vapor retarder or temporary roof before roof installation. 3.03 METAL DECK PREPARATION A. Install deck sheathing on metal deck: 1. Lay with long side at right angle to flutes; stagger end joints; provide support at ends. 2. Cut sheathing cleanly and accurately at roof breaks and protrusions to provide smooth surface. 3. Tape joints. 4. Mechanically fasten sheathing to roof deck, in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. a. Over entire roof area, fasten sheathing using 6 fasteners with washers per sheathing board. b. At roof perimeter to a distance of 4 ft in from edges, fasten sheathing using 6 fasteners with washers per board. 3.04 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. The Carlisle Mechanically Fastened Roof System installation starts by fastening the insulation with a minimum of 4 fasteners per 4' by 8' board. The membrane is mechanically fastened to the deck using HP-X™ Fasteners and Piranha Plates™ or HP-XTRA Fasteners and Piranha XTRA Plates. Adjoining sheets of membrane are overlapped over the fasteners and plates and joined together with a minimum 1-1/2- inch wide (4 cm) hot-air welded. 3.05 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicable requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 7 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. F. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. G. When substrate preparation is responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 3.06 INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge. 2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane. B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation. C. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. D. Do not install wet, damaged, or warped insulation boards. E. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding layer. F. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes. H. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing, and gap between boards no greater than 1/4 inch. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. I. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. J. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches. K. Do not apply more insulation than can be completely waterproofed in the same day. 3.07 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Seam Welding: 1. Seam Welding: Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by heat welding, minimum 2 inches. 2. Cover all seams with manufacturer's recommended joint covers. 3. Probe all seams once welds have thoroughly cooled. (Approximately 30 minutes.) 4. Repair all deficient seams within the same day.
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 8 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
5. Seal cut edges of reinforced membrane after seam probe is complete. D. Mechanical Attachment: 1. Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. The Carlisle Mechanically Fastened Roof System installation starts by fastening the insulation with a minimum of 4 fasteners per 4' by 8' board. The membrane is mechanically fastened to the deck using HP-X™ Fasteners and Piranha Plates™ or HP-XTRA Fasteners and Piranha XTRA Plates. Adjoining sheets of membrane are overlapped over the fasteners and plates and joined together with a minimum 1½"-wide (4 cm) hot-air weld. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. F. Install roofing expansion joints. Make joints watertight. G. Install prefabricated joint components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings. Locate all field splices away from low areas and roof drains. Lap upslope sheet over downslope sheet. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 9 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 10 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and other items indicated in Schedule. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, flashings, and expansion joint covers. B. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. C. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured metal roof curbs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. F. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a. G. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012). H. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook; current edition. I. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Manufacturers: 1. Fairview Architectural LLC: www.fairviewarchitecturalusa.com/sle. 2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com/sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239 inch) thick base metal. B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full colors. C. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 4 inches wide, interlocking with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.
07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant. C. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material. D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I. E. Reglets: Surface mounted type, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details. B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit; secure in place with lead wedges; pack remaining spaces with lead wool; seal flashings into reglets with sealant. C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where permitted.. D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. E. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. F. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION
07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings and fascias not found in other Sections. B. Roof control and expansion joint covers. C. Vent stack boots. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 54 00 - PVC Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Total system roofing warranty including manufactured roof edge flashings and copings. B. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured roof hatches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. C. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012). D. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work. D. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of coping, control joint cover, expansion joint cover, and roof vent. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, fasteners, supporting members, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide warranty coverage as indicated for total roofing system warranty in Section PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Edge Flashings and Copings: 1. Architectural Products Co: www.archprod.com.
07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2. ATAS International, Inc: www.atas.com/sle. 3. Carlisle SynTec: www.carlisle-syntec.com/sle. 4. W.P. Hickman Company: www.wph.com. 5. Metal-Era Inc: www.metalera.com. 6. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Control and Expansion Joint Covers: 1. GAF: www.gaf.com/sle. 2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com. 3. MM Systems Corp: www.mmsystemscorp.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Pipe and Penetration Flashings: 1. Portals Plus: www.portalsplus.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. D. Vent Stack Boots: 1. Johns-Manville. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners. 1. Configuration: Fascia, and edge securement for roof membrane. 2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by ICC (IBC). 3. Material: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, 24 gage, 0.024 inch thick, minimum. 4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Manufacturers: a. W.P. Hickman Company; Extruded TerminEdge: www.wph.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures B. Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners. 1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners. 2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by ICC (IBC). 3. Material: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, 24 gage, 0.024 inch thick, minimum. 4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Manufacturers: a. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Composite construction of 2 inch wide flexible neoprene flashing of black color with closed cell urethane foam backing, each edge seamed to color coated galvanized steel sheet metal flanges, designed for nominal joint width of 1 inch. Include special formed corners, tees, intersections, and wall flashings, each sealed watertight.
07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
D. Pipe and Penetration Flashing: Base of galvanized steel, compatible with metal roof systems, and capable of accomodating pipes sized between 3/8 inch and 12 inch. 1. Caps: Color anodized. 2. Color: As indicated on drawings. E. Vent Stack Boot: TPO Small/Tall Conical Flashing Boot to fit 1/2 to 2 Inch Pipes. Eleven inches tall, 12 inch OD Round Base. Non-reinforced 0.050 TPO with Stainless Steel Top Clamp. F. Plumbing Boot: TPO 2-inch cylindrical TPO plumbing boot, 12 inch OD skirt, 12 in. riser height, 60 Mil reinforced TPO with Stainless Steel clamp. 2-1/2 inch ID fits standard 2 inch pipes. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant for Joints in Linear Components: As recommended by component manufacturer. B. Adhesive for Anchoring to Roof Membrane: Compatible with roof membrane and approved by roof membrane manufacturer. 2.04 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Class I clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant for Joints in Linear Components: As recommended by component manufacturer. B. Adhesive for Anchoring to Roof Membrane: Compatible with roof membrane and approved by roof membrane manufacturer. C. Roof Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 1. Refer to Section 07 72 00 for information on roofing related accessories. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Seal joints within components when required by component manufacturer. C. Anchor components securely. D. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings. E. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water tightness.
07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
F. Boots for Vents and Plumbing Piping: Install prefabricated TPO boots using quick cut-to-fit application in the field following manufacturer’s installation instructions. Heat weld in place and install the stainless steel clamp ring securely. END OF SECTION
07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 71 23 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-finished galvanized steel gutters and downspouts. B. Scuppers. C. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. C. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to SMACNA (ASMM) for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years. B. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. ATAS International, Inc; Water Control: www.atas.com/sle. 2. Cheney Flashing Company: www.cheneyflashing.com. 3. SAF Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc: www.saf.com/persys. 4. W.P. Hickman Company; Wind Resistant Gutter: www.wph.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Scupper and Collectors: 1. ATAS International, Inc; Scuppers and Collector Boxes: www.atas.com/sle.
07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. 1. Finish: Shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 2. Color: As indicated. C. Primer and Solvent for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): As recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile. B. Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile. C. Connectors: Furnish required connector pieces for PVC (polyvinyl chloride) components. D. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with CDA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. E. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. 2.06 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3.02 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Sheet Metal: Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. D. Set splash pans under downspouts. END OF SECTION
07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 71 23 - MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals. B. Roof hatches. C. Safety railings for roof hatches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: Other manufactured roof items. B. Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Ladders; current edition. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. E. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project. Show dimensioned location and number for each type of roof accessory. 1. Non-penetrating Rooftop Supports: Submit design calculations for loadings and spacings. D. Warranty Documentation: 1. Submit manufacturer warranty. 2. Ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty that materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: 1. Acudor Products Inc; Galvanized Steel Roof Hatch: www.acudor.com/#sle. 2. Babcock-Davis; ThermalMAX: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 3. Basis-of-Design: Bilco Company; Type E (ladder access, 3 ft square, solid cover): www.bilco.com/#sle. 4. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Roof Hatches, General: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck. 3. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf. 4. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 36 by 36 inches. 5. Performance Characteristics: a. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf (97 kg/m2) wind uplift. b. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. c. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. d. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb 6. Cover: Shall be 14 gauge (1.9mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel with a 3 inch (76mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. 7. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1inch (25mm) thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal liner: 22 gauge (.8mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel. 8. Curb: Shall be 12 inches (305mm) in height and of select: 14 gauge (1.9mm) paint bond G-90 galvanized steel. The curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2 inch (89mm) flange with 7/16 inch (11.1mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6 inch (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. 9. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1inch (25mm) thickness on outside of curb. 10. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover
07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe. 11. Hardware: a. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided. b. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles. c. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. d. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly. e. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1 inch (25mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing. f. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. g. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space. C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick. 2. Finish: Factory prime paint. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard; 2 inches rigid glass fiber, located on inside hollow curb. 4. Curb Height: 12 inches from surface of roof deck, minimum. D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load. 2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch thick. 3. Finish: Factory prime paint. 4. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard 1 inch rigid glass fiber. 5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. E. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard accessory safety rail system mounted directly to roof hatch curb; do not puncture roof system. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23, with a safety factor of two. 2. Posts and Rails: Aluminum tube. 3. Gate: Same material as railing; automatic closing with latch. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied finish. 5. Gate Hinges and Post Guides: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T5 temper aluminum. 6. Mounting Brackets: Hot dipped galvanized steel, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. 7. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. 8. Manufacturers: a. Bilco Company; Bil-Guard 2.0: www.bilco.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. F. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard telescoping safety post.
07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Basis of Design: Bilco Company; Type LU Ladder Safety Post. G. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. 2.02 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP SUPPORTS A. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Assemblies: Manufacturer-engineered and factory-fabricated, with pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly. 1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes. 2. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 4. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2016a. B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a. C. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). D. ASTM E2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops; 2014b. E. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers; 2010a (Reapproved 2015). F. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2015b. G. ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2013. H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. I. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. J. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition. K. UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. N. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number.
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in UL (FRD) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Trained by manufacturer. 2. Verification of minimum three years documented experience installing work of this type. 3. Verification of at least five satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Firestopping Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. 2. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. 5. Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. B. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Provide firestoppping materials with mold and mildew resistance rating of zero(0) in accordance with ASTM G21.
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. D. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required ratings. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the floor assembly. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. B. Head-of-Wall Joint System Firestopping at Joints Between Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies and Non-Rated Horizontal Assemblies: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. C. Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. D. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 1. Listing by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or UL (FRD) in their certification directories will be considered evidence of successful testing. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system that is listed by ITS (DIR) or UL (FRD) and tested in accordance with ASTM E814, ASTM E119, or UL 1479 with F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with other specified requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Owner's Independent Testing Agency. C. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install labeling required by code. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Testing Agency: Inspection agency employed and paid by Owner, will examine penetration firestopping in accordance with ASTM E2174, and ASTM E2393. B. Repair or replace penetration firestopping and joints at locations where inspection results indicate firestopping or joints do not meet specified requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION
07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories. D. Owner-provided field quality control. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders. B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. C. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015. B. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014. C. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012. D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a. E. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. F. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2014. H. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013). I. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule indicating what products will be installed at what locations. D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection. E. Field Quality Control Plan: Submit at least two weeks prior to start of installation.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at least three years of documented experience. B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to perform the field quality control inspection and testing as referenced in PART 3 of this section and as follows, to prepare and submit the field quality control plan and log, and to provide recommendations of remedies in the case of failure. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with testing agency and repair failures discovered and destructive test location damage. C. Field Quality Control Plan: 1. Visual inspection of entire length of sealant joints. D. Non-Destructive Field Adhesion Test: Test for adhesion in accordance with ASTM C1521, using Nondestructive Spot Method. 1. Record results on Field Quality Control Log. 2. Repair failed portions of joints. E. Field Adhesion Tests of Joints: Test for adhesion using most appropriate method in accordance with ASTM C1521, or other applicable method as recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction/sle. 4. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/?sle. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. 7. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 8. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 9. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form a smooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint. 1. Adhesives Technology Corporation: www.atcepoxy.com/#sle. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. 5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/?sle. 6. QUIKRETE Companies: www.quikrete.com/#sle. 7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. 8. Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 9. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 10. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on the drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Wall expansion and control joints. b. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. c. Joints between different exposed materials. d. Openings below ledge angles in masonry. e. Joints between concrete curb and concrete slab at Storefront. 2. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices, piping, and other openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and other flanking sound paths. 1) Exception: Such gaps and openings in gypsum board finished stud walls and suspended ceilings. 2) Exception: Through-penetrations in sound-rated assemblies that are also fire-rated assemblies. c. Other joints indicated below. B. Exterior Joints: Use non-sag non-staining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, non-curing. 2. Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, non-curing or as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. C. Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 2. Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant. . 3. In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 4. In Fire Rated and Smoke Smoke Assemblies: Acrylic latex sealant. 5. Narrow Control Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs: Self-leveling epoxy sealant. 6. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms and restrooms; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items: Non-sag polyurethane sealant. 7. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or "acoustical": Acrylic emulsion latex.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 35 percent, minimum. 2. Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. 4. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Cure Type: Single-component, neutral moisture curing. 7. Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791 Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant: www.dowcorning.com/construction/#sle. b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. c. Sika Corporation; Sikasil WS-290: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: White. 2. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede-1/-TX Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. c. Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede 2NS Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. d. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1a: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. e. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c NS: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures . D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
c. Sherwin-Williams Company; 950A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. d. Sherwin-Williams Company; Powerhouse Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures . E. Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based; ASTM C1311; single component, nonsag; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 13 to 180 degrees F. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sherwin-Williams Company; Storm Blaster All Season Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. F. Non-Curing Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based; ASTM C1311; single component, nonsag, non-skinning, non-hardening, non-bleeding; vapor-impermeable; intended for fully concealed applications. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora: BC-158 Butyl Rubber Sealant. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.04 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS A. Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent, explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure when recessed below traffic surface; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion. 1. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 0 to 15, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers: a. Sika Corporation; Sikasil 728RCS: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil 728SL: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Spectrem 900SL: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion . 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 35 to 55, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. The QUIKRETE Companies; QUIKRETE® Polyurethane Self-Leveling Sealant: www.quikrete.com/#sle.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
c. Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede 1SL Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. d. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1c SL: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type B - Bi-Cellular Polyethylene. 2. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. D. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. E. Concrete Joints That Will Be Exposed in Completed Work: Test joint filler in inconspicuous area to verify that it does not stain or discolor slab. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. G. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. H. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. I. Concrete Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to perform field quality control inspection and testing as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article. B. Non-Destructive Adhesion Testing: If there are any failures in first 100 linear feet, notify Architect immediately. C. Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures as indicated for original installation. END OF SECTION
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Field painting. D. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003 (R2009). B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014. C. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. E. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2007. F. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2006. G. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. C. Schedule: Submit schedule of door types, sizes, and location of installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least five years of experience. C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.
08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Door Assemblies; includes doors, frames, glazing and hardware. 1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 4. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated. 1. Grade and Level: ANSI/SDI A250.8; Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C, Model 1 - Full Flush. a. Model 1 - Full Flush. b. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum. c. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M. 2. Core: Polystyrene. 3. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 6.0 minimum, for installed thickness of polystyrene. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 5. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 71 00. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 1 - Standard-Duty, Physical Performance Level C, Model 2 - Seamless. a. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum. 2. Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded type. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating.
08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 1. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inch, maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. D. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inch high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry, concrete or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. 1. Comply with recommended practice for hardware placement of doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6 or NAAMM HMMA 861. E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION
08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire-rated and non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Hollow metal frames for flush wood doors. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0; 2016. C. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015. D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. E. WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors, frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing, and other details 1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. E. Samples: Door veneer samples, 8 by 10 inches in size, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. F. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. C. Quality Certification:
08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades specified. 2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program. 3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program. 4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Basis of Design: Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" submit or a substitution request for one of the manufacturers listed below: a. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 DOORS AND PANELS A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with ICC (IBC) - Positive Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated.
08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Cherry, veneer grade in accordance with quality standard indicated, plain sliced (flat cut), with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face. 1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade. 2. "Running Match" each pair of doors and doors in close proximity to each other. 3. "Pair Match" each pair of doors; "Set Match" pairs of doors within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. 4. Transoms: Continuous match to doors. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. C. Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has been applied full-width. D. Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1A for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - TR-8, UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane. b. Stain: As selected by Architect to match existing stained wood doors in same building. c. Sheen: Flat. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 12 13. B. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Install door louvers plumb and level. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION
08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, manual operation. B. Operating hardware tracks and supports. C. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates for hurricane-resistant door alternate as required by AHJ, Alternate 2 - Sectional Doors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. B. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; 2011. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D. Samples: Submit two panel finish samples, 4 x 4 inch minimum in size, illustrating color and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. F. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. G. Maintenance Data: Include data for transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that exterior products meet or exceed specified requirements including applicable performance requirements. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements.
08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Haas Door, A Nofziger Comapny, 320 Sycamore Street, Wauseon, Ohio. Model: Commercial Aluminum Series CA-220 CA-110. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to approved substitution procedures, other manufacturers that will be reviewed for substitution are: 1. C.H.I. Overhead Doors: www.chiohd.com/sle. 2. Clopay Building Products: www.clopaydoor.com/sle. 3. Entrematic: www.amarr.com/commercial/sle. 4. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties: www.fimbelads.com. 5. Raynor Garage Doors. 6. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ALUMINUM DOORS A. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates, Alternate 2 - Sectional Doors for providing hurricane-resistant doors if required by AHJ. B. Aluminum Doors: Stile and rail aluminum with glazed panels; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load. 2. Door Nominal Thickness: 1-3/4 inches thick. 3. Finish: Factory anodized; clear anodized; match storefront system finish. 4. Glazing: Full panel glass; full height glass. No individual lights. C. Design Characteristics: Provide sectional doors as follows: 1. Framing: Sections shall be 1.75 inches (44.5mm) thick full tubular aluminum framework with 0.125 inch (3.18mm) wall thickness wherever hardware attaches. Vertical stiles and horizontal rails shall be assembled using internal steel thru-bolts. Horizontal meeting rails shall have rabbeted overlap joints. 2. Doors are built to meet or exceed standards established by DASMA 102. 3. Panels: Glazing and solid panels as selected shall be set in a continuous glazing sealant and held in place by inside vinyl snap-in glazing bead. 4. End Stile Type: 4 inch aluminum. 5. Center Stile Type: 2 inch aluminum. 6. Rails: Meeting shall be 4 inch aluminum. 7. Rails Top and Bottom: 4 inch aluminum. 2.03 DOOR COMPONENTS A. Spring Counterbalance: Sized to weight of door and with a minimum 7 to 1 safety factor: 1. Standard Cycle Springs: 10,000 cycles, minimum.
08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Track: Galvanized steel, gage and profile as recommended by manufacturer for loading required and clearances available. C. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. D. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided stainless steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open. E. Sill Weatherstripping: Flexible neoprene seal, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. F. Jamb Weatherstripping: Flexible seals, placed in moderate contact with door panels. G. Head Weatherstripping: Flexible seals, one piece full length on top panel. H. Handle: Interior handle. I. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock. J. Lock Cylinders: Keyed alike. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.
08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify adjustments to door assembly for specified operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION
08 36 13 - SECTIONAL DOORS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Weatherstripping. D. Sill sweep and threshold. E. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates for alternate to add hurricane resistant storefront system and doors to bid. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. B. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2015. C. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. D. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. F. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. H. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. I. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. J. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. K. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. L. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). M. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. N. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass, door hardware, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Certificate: Confirm exterior storefront and aluminum entrance doors meet specified wind load design criteria identified on Drawings and as determined by the AHJ decision. E. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inches minimum in size illustrating aluminum finish. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed specified performance requirements. G. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. H. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door numbers identified in the drawings. I. Installer Qualifications Statement. J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least five years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 2 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING FOR INSULATING AND MONOLITHIC GLAZING A. Two systems are identified in this Section depending on the AHJ's determination of the wind category. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates. B. Center-Set Style, Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance Tested (Alternate 1 - Storefront System): 1. Basis of Design: Kawneer Company, Inc.. a. Florida Building Code Database Approval Number for Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Refer to Drawings; includes approval for the following components: storefront system, glazing, anchoring requirements and installation of components. C. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken: 1. Basis of Design: Kawneer Company Inc. D. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalent product of one of the manufacturers listed below: 1. Coral Architectural Products, a division of Coral Industries, Inc: www.coralap.com/#sle. 2. EFCO, a Pella Company. 3. Oldcastle Building Envelope. 4. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC: www.trulite.com. 5. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. F. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions. 2.02 SWINGING DOORS A. Medium Stile, Wind-borne Debris Tested, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken (Alternate 1 - Storefront Systems): 1. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America. a. Florida Building Code Database Approval Number for Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Refer to Drawings; includes approval for the following components: door, door hardware, door glazing and installation of components. b. Finish: Color Anodized Finish with Organic Seal. B. Medium Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken:
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Basis of Design: Kawneer North America; Medium Stile Thermal Entrance. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalent product of one of the manufacturers listed below: 1. Coral Architectural Products, a division of Coral Industries, Inc: www.coralap.com/#sle. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope; www.oldcastlebe.com. 3. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC: www.trulite.com. 4. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions. 2.03 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Unitized, shop assembly. 2. Glazing Rabbet for Insulating Glazing: For 1-inch insulating glazing. 3. Finish: Class I natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 4. Finish Color: Clear anodized. 5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 8. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 9. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 10. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 11. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. B. Performance Requirements for Exterior Systems: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 4 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. Wind Load Design Criteria: a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance (Alternate 1 - Storefront Systems): Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary protection, having Florida Building Code "FLA (PAD)" approval for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind pressure. 4. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8 psf. 5. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing Stops: Flush. 2. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00. C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Stile and Rail Width: As indicated on drawings. 3. Bottom Rail: 8 inches wide. 4. Glazing Stops: Square. 5. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. E. Exposed Flashings: Aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness; finish to match framing members. F. Concealed Flashings: Sheet aluminum, 26 gage, 0.017 inch minimum thickness. G. Sill Flashing Sealant: Elastomeric, silicone or polyurethane, compatible with flashing material. H. Sealant for Setting Thresholds: Non-curing butyl type. I. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. J. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. K. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application. 2.07 HARDWARE A. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, and threshold. B. Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome. 2. For each door, include butt hinges, pivots, push handle, pull handle, narrow stile handle latch, and closer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 6 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2 hose test. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash. B. Factory glazing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. C. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. D. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). E. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009. F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. G. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. H. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. J. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. K. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016). M. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2015. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, and internal drainage details.
08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations, and installation requirements. D. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the following showing compliance with specified grade: 1. Evidence of AAMA Certification. 2. Evidence of WDMA Certification. 3. Evidence of CSA Certification. 4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Test Reports: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit test report(s) by independent testing agency showing compliance with performance requirements in excess of those prescribed by specified grade. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Windows: 1. EFCO, a Pella Company: www.efcocorp.com/#sle. 2. Manko Window Systems, Inc: www.mankowindows.com. 3. Peerless Products, Inc: www.peerlessproducts.com.
08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. TRACO: www.traco.com. 5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems: www.wausauwindow.com. 6. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 WINDOWS A. Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished, with related flashings and anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Frame Depth: 3-1/2 inches. 2. Provide units factory glazed. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for operating hardware and imposed loads. 4. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 5. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type: a. Performance Class (PC): AW. 2. Design Pressure (DP): In accordance with applicable codes. 3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 4. Water Leakage: No uncontrolled leakage on interior face when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at differential pressure of 12.11 psf. 5. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.1 cu ft/min sq ft per unit area of outside frame dimension, with 6.27 psf differential pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. 6. Condensation Resistance Factor of Frame: 50, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503. 7. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.35, maximum, measured on the window size required for this project. C. Fixed, Non-Operable Type: 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing: Double; clear; transparent. 3. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized. 4. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper.
08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
C. Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive aluminum windows. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Install sill and sill end angles. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and the same pressure difference as specified for laboratory testing. 1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense. B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. END OF SECTION
08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swing Door Assemblies. 3. ASTM E1886 - Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Shutters Impacted by Missiles and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 4. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure difference. 5. ASTM E1996 - Standard specification for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls, doors and storm shutters impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 6. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 8. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 9. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 10. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 11. TAS-201-94 - Impact Test Procedures. 12. TAS-202-94 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure. 13. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Proof of Qualification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) Factory Trained Installer documentation indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 2 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
D. Windstorm Assembly Installer Qualifications: Installers are to be factory trained for shop and field installation prior to project bid, and are responsible for commissioning, servicing, and warranting the installed equipment specified for the project. A pre-installation site inspection of the frame and floor conditions shall be conducted by the factory trained installer prior to any Windstorm assembly hardware applied to the opening.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
F. Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings: Provide exterior door hardware as complete and tested assemblies, or component assemblies, including approved doors and frames specified under Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames", to meet the wind loads, design pressures, debris impact resistance, and glass and glazing requirements applicable to the Project.
1. Test units according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards, certified by a qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, and bearing a third party certification agency permanent label indicting windstorm approved product.
G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.
H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 3 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 4 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Five years for exit hardware. 4. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 5 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut- outs.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). c. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 6 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
G. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 7 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. c. Stanley Best (BE) – 40H-UN Series.
B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.
1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.
2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
3. Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.2 requirements to 2 million cycles.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 10 Line. c. Stanley Best (BE) – 9K Series.
2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 8 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.6 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
11. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Conventional exit devices are to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 9 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.
6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
8. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Door closers to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 10 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.8 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).
2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 11 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Architectural seals to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 12 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 13 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 14 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3. SA - Sargent 4. RO - Rockwood 5. RF - Rixson
Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0 Doors: 100A, 100B, 200A, 201A, 202A, 203A, 204A, 205A, 206A, 207A, 208A, 208B, 300A, 301A, 302A, 303A, 304A, 400A, 401A, 500A, 501A, 502A, 600A, 600A1, 601A, 602A, 603A, 603B, 604A, 700A, 701A, 800A, 801A, 802A, 803A, 900A, 900B, 901A, 902A, E001, E003 Description: EXT PR - ALUM
2 Continuous Hinge KCFMXX-HD1 PE 1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM3240-16 US32 RO 2 Concealed Closer 91N 90N [special template] 626 RF 2 Door Stop 467 Black RO 1 Threshold 271A MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing by door / frame mfg
Notes: Hardware listed for design criteria, confirm with specific door manufacturer the hardware requirements to meet specified windstorm rating - Provide 3rd party test results for confirmation.
Set: 2.0 Doors: 605A, G001, G008, G009, G010, G011, G012 Description: EXT - ALUM
1 Continuous Hinge KCFMXX-HD1 PE 1 Rim Exit Device AD8504 Less Pull US32D SA 1 Pull RM3240-16 US32 RO 1 Door Closer 281 PS EN SA 1 Threshold 271A MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing by door / frame mfg
Notes: Hardware listed for design criteria, confirm with specific door manufacturer the hardware requirements to meet specified windstorm rating - Provide 3rd party test results for confirmation.
Set: 3.0 Doors: 100C, 100D, 100E, 100F, 200B, 201B, 202B, 203B, 204B, 205B, 206B, 207B, 208C, 300B, 301B, 302B, 303B, 304B, 400B, 401B, 500B, 501B, 502B, 600A2, 600B, 601B, 602B, 603C, 604B, 605B, 700B, 701B, 800B, 800C, 801B, 802B, 803B, 900C, 901B, 902B Description: EXT - REAR RETAIL
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 15 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Rim Exit Device 8804 ETP US32D SA 1 Door Closer 281 PS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" X 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 271A MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x LAR PE 1 Sweep 3452AV PE
Notes: Hardware listed for design criteria, confirm with specific door manufacturer the hardware requirements to meet specified windstorm rating - Provide 3rd party test results for confirmation.
Set: 4.0 Doors: 200R, 304R, 400R, 502R, 601R, 700R, 902R, E005R Description: EXT - MAINT
3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK 1 Dormitory Lock 8225 LNP US32D SA 1 Door Closer 281 PS EN SA 1 Threshold 271A MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing S773D PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x LAR PE 1 Sweep 3452AV PE
Notes: Hardware listed for design criteria, confirm with specific door manufacturer the hardware requirements to meet specified windstorm rating - Provide 3rd party test results for confirmation.
Set: 5.0 Doors: E019, E020 Description: TOILET
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Privacy Set 10U65 LP US26D SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 4" X 1" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 / 446 [as required] US32D RO
END OF SECTION
08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 16 of 16 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating glass units. B. Monolithic glass units. C. Glazing accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing in exterior storefront assemblies. B. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015). B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. D. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2015. E. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. F. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. G. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009. H. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. I. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009. J. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2004). K. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014. L. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014. M. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2014. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by each of the affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Product Data on Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA TM-3000 for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Glass North America, Inc: www.agc-yourglass.com/#sle. 2. Guardian Glass, LLC: www.guardianglass.com. 3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle. 4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Design Pressure: In accordance with design criteria indicated on drawing referenced in Section 01 41 00. 2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass. 3. Seismic Loads: Design and size glazing components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement in accordance with design criteria indicated in referenced drawing. See Section 01 41 00 for referenced structural design criteria..
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 5. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. Provide greater thickness as required for exterior wind load design including wind-borne debris region requirements. B. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3. 2. Thicknesses: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimum; provide greater thickness as required for glass areas, dimensions and application. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.. B. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS. 3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Spacer Color: Black. 5. Edge Seal: a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant as secondary seal applied around perimeter. 6. Color: Black. 7. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed. 2.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, with low-E coating. 1. Applications: Exterior insulating glass glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space between lites filled with air. 3. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Winter - Center of Glass: 0.29, nominal.
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
5. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing. 6. Basis of Design - Guardian Industries Corporation: www.sunguardglass.com/#sle. 7. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, except where to be fully tempered; 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Low-E Coating: SunGuard SNX 51/23 on #2 surface. b. Glass Tint: Gray. 8. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, except where required to be fully tempered; 1/4 inch thick. a. Coating: No coating on inboard lite. b. Glass: Clear. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards. B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions.
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc. 3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.05 CLEANING A. See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.06 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
08 80 00 - GLAZING Page 6 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Gypsum sheathing. F. Cementitious backing board. G. Gypsum wallboard. H. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012. B. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016). C. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016). D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. E. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. F. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014. G. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. H. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017. I. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2016. J. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015. K. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 1 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
L. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. M. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. N. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2013a. O. ASTM C1325 - Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units; 2017. P. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a. Q. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2013. R. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. S. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. T. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016). U. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016. V. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2016. W. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, joint finishing system, acoustic insulation, and acoustic sealant. C. Shop Drawings: Provide control joint layout plan with related dimensioning. Indicate details associated with acoustic seals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum three years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Interior Partitions: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated on the Drawings, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.
09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 2 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. D. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as indicated on the drawings 1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL (FRD). 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through both legs; both legs expanded metal mesh. B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12. 2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. 3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems of fire rating and movement required. 4. Deflection and Firestop Track: a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 3 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold resistant board is required at all locations. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating or as Type X: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch. 6. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products: a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc Type X. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Impact Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application: At walls with tile applied. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 4. Glass Mat-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M. 5. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. D. Backing Board For Wet Areas and Exterior Sheathing: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including exterior sheathing. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle. 2) USG Corporation; Durock: www.usg.com. 3) James Hardie Building Products; Hardie Backer 500 Cement Board. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. E. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 4 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
F. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C1177/C1177M. 4. Core Type: Type X. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 7. Edges: Square. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Thickness: 3-1/2 inches in 3-5/8 inch cavity; 4 inches in 4-inch cavity. 2. Products; subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com/sle. b. Owens Corning; Thermafiber SAFB. www.thermafiber.com. c. ROXUL, Inc; COMFORTBATT: www.roxul.com/sle. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. 1. Manufacturers; use one of the following: a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond GREENchoice Acoustical Smoke & Sound Sealant: www.titebond.com/sle. b. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR: www.pecora.com. d. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. e. USG; Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant. C. Fire Rated Joint Sealant for Head Joints: Refer to Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Products: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 2. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners. 3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 4. Chemical hardening type compound. F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 5 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant. H. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation. 1. Length to suit insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. I. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet strapping for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Toilet accessories. 6. Wall mounted door hardware. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. 1. Provide supplementary support when insulation does not fill cavity or one side of cavity is left open and partition is 8 feet or higher. Provide pin system at 12 inches on center maximum. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install as follows: 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 6 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant. D. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. 1. Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant. E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Walls: Not more than 20 feet and not less than 16 feet apart. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 3. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. 4. Level 0: Temporary partitions. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer.
09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 7 of 8 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, SC, SC 03.23.2018
3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION
09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 8 of 8 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustical insulation above acoustical ceiling system. B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a. B. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2016. C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. D. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015. E. ICC-ES AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2015). F. ICC-ES AC368 - Acceptance Criteria for Suspended Ceiling Framing Systems; 2015. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. D. Samples: Submit two samples, approximately 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, approximately 9 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and perimeter molding. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc: www.acpideas.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. B. Acoustical Tile: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Composition: Nodular, cast or molded. 4. Edge: Square tegular. 5. Surface Color: White. 6. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. B. Exposed Suspension System: Formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted.
09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide suspension system tested for compliance with ICC (IBC) requirements for Seismic Category D as tested by ICC-ES AC156 and ICC-ES AC368. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Acoustical Insulation: Specified in Section 07 21 00. 1. Size: To fit acoustical suspension system. D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with suspended ceiling system. E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. 1. Manufacturer's Alternative Construction Method: Manufacturer's alternative construction method meeting specified performance requirements is acceptable. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plan. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions.
09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant. 2. Use longest practical lengths. 3. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. G. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating requirements. H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION
09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient stair accessories. B. Installation accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine; 2011. B. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015. C. ASTM E662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015. E. ASTM F925 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring; 2013. F. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM F2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads; 2015. H. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. Submit in size of specified units. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style, color, quantity and run numbers. B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space. C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. D. Do not double stack pallets. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Stringers with Integral Risers: Rubber; full height of riser, full width and depth of tread in one piece; tapered thickness. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkeflooring.com. b. Basis-of-Design: Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; Stairwell Management - Integral Resilient Stair Stringers and Risers: www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1861 and ASTM F2169, Type TS, rubber, vulcanized thermoset. 3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253; Class 1. 4. Smoke Density: Less than 450, ASTM E662. 5. Slip Resistance: SCOF greater than 0.8 per ASTM D2047. 6. Resistance to Heat: Less than 8.0 when tested to ASTM F1514. 7. Resistance to Light: Less than 8.0 when tested to ASTM F1515. 8. Hardness: Minimum 85 Shore A when tested to ASTM D2240. 9. Chemical Resistance: Good per ASTM F925 10. Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. 11. Nosing: Square. 12. Tread Texture: Raised. 13. Tread Pattern: Bamboo. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly. 3.03 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread. B. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION
09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Shop-primed items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005 (Reapproved 2012). B. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. C. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). D. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. E. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; (Reaffirmed 2015); 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of substitutions proposed. C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, approximately 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Maintenance Data: Submit coating maintenance manual including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer. 1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. B. Paints: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer:Sherwin-Williams. 2. Subject to approval through specified substitution procedures, manufacturers with systems that will be considered as substitutes are: a. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com. b. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. c. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/sle. d. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com. e. Valspar Corporation: www.valsparpaint.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. D. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Exterior Surfaces to be Painted: Includes concrete, fiber cement siding, and primed metal. 1. Two top coats and one primer coat. 2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Latex. B. Pre-primed Ferrous Metal Substrates: Exterior Alkyd Enamel Top Coats. 1. Primer: Prime as required for consistent base finish: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer; apply at manufacturer's recommended rate. 2. Top Coats: Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Water Based Alkyd Urethane Enamel; Semi-Gloss. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. C. Galvanized Metal Substrates, Acrylic Primer and Alkyd Topcoats, 3 Coat System: 1. Primer: One coat primer for galvanized metals: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate. 2. Top Coats: Two top coats of alkyd enamel; Sherwin-Williams Water Based Alkyd Urethane Enamel; semi-gloss. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Fiber Cement Siding: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Concrete: 1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi at 6 to 12 inches. Allow to dry. 3. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry. 4. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 13. G. Fiber Cement Siding: Remove dirt, dust and other foreign matter with a stiff fiber brush. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. H. Galvanized Substrates: 1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2. I. Ferrous Metal Substrates: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Touch-up primer as required. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. J. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional coats until complete hide is achieved. G. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items. B. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2016. B. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2015. C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition, www.paintinfo.com. D. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Maintenance Data: Submit coating maintenance manual including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used, care and cleaning instructions, and color samples of each color and finish used. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer.
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply materials when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer. B. Paints: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Other manufacturers that may be submitted as a substitution include: a. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com. b. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/sle. c. Valspar Corporation: www.valsparpaint.com. C. Transparent Finishes: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. D. Stains: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. E. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. F. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 2 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. C. Sheens: As indicated on drawings or as specified herein. D. Colors: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, wood, shop primed steel, and galvanized steel. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat Sheen: a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces. b. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen restroom walls. c. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at doors, door frames, railings, and other items identified on Finish Schedule. 3. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate. B. Transparent Finish on Wood. 1. Stain: Semi-Transparent Stain for Wood; MPI #90. a. Products: 1) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain. (MPI #90) 2) Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Sealer: Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear; MPI #102. a. Products: 1) Sherwin-Williams Wood Classics FastDry Sanding Sealer. (MPI #102) C. Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. D. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, Three-coat: 1. One coat of latex primer: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer; omit primer if pre-primed. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Latex Semigloss. E. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. F. Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer.
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 3 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. G. Gypsum Board, Latex, Three-coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer; ProMar 200 Latex Primer. 2. Finish Coats: Two coats of latex enamel; ProMar 200 Latex; Flat or Satin. 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide as recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 1. Interior Drywall Primer Sealer. 2. Interior Rust-Inhibitive Water Based Primer. 3. Interior Water Based Primer for Galvanized Metal. 4. Latex Primer for Interior Wood. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Galvanized Surfaces: G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 4 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. H. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. I. Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. D. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. F. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 5 of 6 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 6 of 6 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. B. Electric hand/hair dryers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide three keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.
10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.02 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. C. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.03 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Mirrors (TA-1): NIC. B. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TA-2): Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel. C. Paper Towel Dispenser (TA-3): Folded paper type, stainless steel, surface-mounted, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock. 1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum. D. Combination Tower Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (TA-3): Surface mounted, stainless steel, Automatic dispenser. E. Soap Dispenser (TA-4): Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. F. Grab Bars (TA-5, TA-6, TA-7): Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. G. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (TA-8): Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, locking bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle. 2.04 ELECTRIC HAND/HAIR DRYERS A. Electric Hand Dryers (TA-9): Traditional fan-in-case type, with downward fixed nozzle. 1. Operation: Automatic, sensor-operated on and off. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Cover: Plastic. a. Tamper-resistant screw attachment of cover to mounting plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
C. For electrically-operated accessories, verify that electrical power connections are ready and in the correct locations. D. See Section 09 22 16 for installation of reinforcing plates in walls. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grab Bars: As indicated on drawings. 2. Other Accessories: As indicated on drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION
10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 10 73 16 METAL CANOPIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall-mounted, hanger-rod supported, metal canopies. B. Steel framing and fittings. C. Aluminum flat decking and open louver canopies. D. Flashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements: Reference to drawings providing structural design criteria for metal canopies. B. Section 03 45 00 - Precast Architectural Concrete: Embed anchors in precast for canopy framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. D. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013 Supplements and Errata. F. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. G. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with work of other sections to which canopies will be attached. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, hardware, drainage details and attachment devices. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, sizes, connection attachments, fabrication tolerances, affected related work, size and type of fasteners, accessories, drainage components and flashings. Indicate structural component locations, materials, dimensions and details of construction and assembly. 1. Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.
10 73 16 - METAL CANOPIES Page 1 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
D. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inches minimum in size illustrating aluminum finish, and color. E. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of canopies, framing and support structure, stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer. F. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design metal canopies under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least five years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Canopies: 1. Mapes Industries, Inc.; Super Lumideck, Hanger-Rod Supported, Flat Soffit and SuperShade Louvered. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. 2.03 METAL CANOPIES A. Decking: Flat soffit fabricated from 0.078-inch extruded aluminum. B. Sunshade: Louvered blades fabricated from 0.110 inch extruded aluminum. C. Fascia: Manufacturer's standard, extruded aluminum, 8-inch deep, J-style fascia.
10 73 16 - METAL CANOPIES Page 2 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
2.04 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM A. Intermediate Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T6, in profile and thickness provided by manufacturer. B. Finish Exposed Components: Baked enamel to match color of the aluminum canopy. 2.05 STEEL FRAMING SYSTEM A. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. Refer to Drawings for connection material requirements. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. C. All Louvered Sunshade canopies are shipped in preassembled sections for ease of installation. All connections shall be mechanically assembled utilizing 3/16 fasteners with a minimum shear stress of 350 lbs. Pre-welded or factory-welded connections are not acceptable. D. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. E. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as framing, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Accurately form components to suit each other and to building structure. G. Concealed Drainage: Fabricate for internal water drainage into scupper outlet at front of canopy. 2.07 FINISHES A. Class II Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A31 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils thick. B. Superior Performing Organic Coatings: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) system. 1. Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat thermoplastic fluoropolymer coating system, including minimum 70 percent PVDF color topcoat and minimum total dry film thickness of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as selected from manufacturer’s standard color selections. C. Hanger Rods and Attachment Hardware: Manufacturer's standard painted finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall substrate anchors are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and placed in partitions with setting templates, to appropriate Sections. 3.03 FRAMING NSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings.
10 73 16 - METAL CANOPIES Page 3 of 4 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. C. Anchor framing to structure. D. Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Grind welds smooth. Touch-up welds with primer. E. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Misalignment From True Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION
10 73 16 - METAL CANOPIES Page 4 of 4 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
SECTION 14 21 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete electric traction elevator systems. 1. Passenger type. B. Elevator Maintenance Contract. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). C. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. D. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010. E. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. F. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2013. G. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; 2014. H. ASME QEI-1 - Standard for the Qualification of Elevator Inspectors; 2013. I. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. J. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2016a. K. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. L. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. M. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. N. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. O. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. P. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. Q. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. R. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). S. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 1 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
T. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. U. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2016. V. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. W. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. X. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. Y. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate work with other installers to provide necessary conduits for proper installation of wiring, including but not limited to, the following: a. Elevator equipment devices remote from elevator machine room or hoistway. b. Remote group automatic panel from controller cabinet. c. Telephone service for elevator. d. Fire alarm panel from controller cabinet. 2. Coordinate work with other installers for equipment provisions necessary for proper elevator operation, including but not limited to, the following: a. Automatic transfer switches with auxiliary contacts for emergency power transfer status indication. b. Shunt trip devices for automatic disconnection of elevator power prior to fire suppression system activation; include provisions for shunt trip power monitoring. c. Overcurrent protection devices selected to achieve required selective coordination. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene meeting at least one week prior to start of this work. 1. Review schedule of installation, proper procedures and conditions, and coordination with related work. C. Construction Use of Elevator: Not permitted. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on following items: 1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, and indicators. 2. Car design, dimensions, layout, and components. 3. Car and hoistway door and frame details. 4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings and details on following items: 1. Elevator Equipment and Machines: Size and location of driving machines, power units, controllers, governors, and other components. 2. Hoistway Components: Size and location of car machine beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes, and other components. 3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structural framing.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 2 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
4. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight. 5. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for car lighting and telephone. 6. Location and sizes of hoistway and car doors and frames. 7. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 8. Indicate arrangement of elevator equipment and allow for clear passage of equipment through access openings. D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating car floor material, car interior finishes, car and hoistway door and frame finishes, and handrail material and finish in the form of finish color selection brochures. E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F. Initial Maintenance Contract. G. Maintenance Contract: Submit proposal to Owner for standard one year continuing maintenance contract agreement in accordance with ASME A17.1 and requirements as indicated, starting on date initial maintenance contract is scheduled to expire. 1. Indicate in proposal the services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for renewal options. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Operation and maintenance manual. 3. Schematic drawings of equipment, and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment with list of corresponding symbols to identify markings on hoistway apparatus. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each quality standard document on site. B. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a licensed Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. D. Installer Qualifications: Supervisor along with trained elevator installation personnel on staff of elevator equipment manufacturer. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. F. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) or testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated in construction documents. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 3 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
B. Provide manufacturer's warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design - Electric Traction Elevators: Schindler; 3300 MRL Traction Elevator. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers - Electric Traction Elevators: 1. Otis Elevator Company: www.otis.com. 2. ThyssenKrupp Elevator: www.thyssenkruppelevator.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements and 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures. D. Source Limitations: Provide elevator and associated equipment and components produced by the same manufacturer as the other elevator equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS A. Electric Traction Passenger Elevator: 1. Electric Traction Elevator Equipment: a. Gearless Traction Machine: Machine room-less traction driving sheave, with dual brake. 2. Drive System: a. Variable voltage alternating current (AC). 3. Operation Control Type: a. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control. 4. Interior Car Height: 93 inch. 5. Electrical Power: 480 volts; alternating current (AC); three phase; 60 Hz. 6. Rated Net Capacity: 3500 pounds. 7. Rated Speed: 150 feet per minute. 8. Hoistway Size: As indicated on drawings. 9. Interior Car Platform Size: As indicated on drawings. 10. Elevator Pit Depth: 60 inch. 11. Overhead Clearance at Top Floor: 151 inch. 12. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings. 13. Number of Stops: As indicated on drawings. 14. Traction Machine Location: Top of hoistway shaft. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Elevator Equipment: 1. Motors, Controllers, Controls, Buttons, Wiring, Devices, and Indicators: Comply with NFPA 70. Refer to Section 26 05 83. 2. Guide Rails, Cables, Counterweights, Sheaves, Buffers, Attachment Brackets and Anchors: Design criteria for components includes safety factors in accordance with applicable requirements of Elevator Code, ASME A17.1. 3. Lubrication Equipment: a. Provide grease fittings for periodic lubrication of bearings. b. Grease Cups: Automatic feed type. c. Lubrication Points: Visible and easily accessible.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 4 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
B. Electrical Equipment: 1. Motors: NEMA MG 1. 2. Spare Conductors: Provide ten percent in extra conductors and two pairs of shielded audio cables in traveling cables. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, applicable local codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with ADA Standards. C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360. D. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70. 2.05 OPERATION CONTROLS A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing operating panels and landing indicator panels. 1. Landing Operating Panels: Metallic type, one for originating "Up" and one for originating "Down" calls, one button only at terminating landings; with illuminating indicators. 2. Landing Indicator Panels: Illuminating. 3. Comply with ADA Standards for elevator controls. B. Interconnect elevator control system with building security, fire alarm, smoke alarm, and building management control systems. C. Door Operation Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor landing. 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatch landing with doors open. 3. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equipped with object proximity detector device. D. Provide "Firefighter's Emergency Operation" in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicable building codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. Designated Landing: Main Lobby. 2.06 OPERATION CONTROL TYPE A. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control: Applies to car in single elevator shaft. 1. Refer to description provided in ASME A17.1. 2. Automatic operation by means of one button in the car for each landing served and by "UP" and "DOWN" buttons at the landings. 3. Stops are registered by momentary actuation of landing car buttons without consideration of the number of buttons actuated or the sequence buttons are actuated, but the stops are made in the order that landings are reached in each direction of travel. 4. All "UP" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the up direction.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 5 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
5. All "DOWN" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the down direction. 6. Uppermost and lowermost calls are answered as soon as they are reached without consideration of the car travel direction. 2.07 EMERGENCY POWER A. Set-up elevator operation to run with elevator emergency power supply when the normal building power supply fails, and in compliance with ASME A17.1 requirements. B. Elevator Emergency Power Supply: Supplied by battery backup; provide elevator system components as required for emergency power characteristics. C. Emergency Lighting: Comply with ASME A17.1 elevator lighting requirements. D. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power. E. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected landing, stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby condition. 2.08 MATERIALS A. Rolled Steel Sections, Shapes, Rods: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304; No. 4 Brushed finish unless otherwise indicated. D. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes and Moldings: ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), natural anodized finish unless otherwise indicated. F. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3105 alloy, O temper. G. Plywood: PS 1, Structural I, Grade C-D or better, sanded. H. Tempered Glass: 3/8 inch minimum thickness, fully tempered in compliance with ASME A17.1, 16 CFR 1201, ANSI Z97.1, and ASTM C1048 tempered glass requirements. I. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Type HGS, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line of colors. J. Floor Finish: To be determined (TBD). 2.09 CAR AND HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Elevator, Passenger: 1. Car and Hoistway Entrances, Main Elevator Lobby: a. Hoistway Fire Rating: 2 Hours. b. Framed Opening Finish and Material: Brushed stainless steel. c. Car Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. d. Hoistway Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. e. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed. f. Door Width: As indicated on drawings. g. Door Height: As indicated on drawings.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 6 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
h. Sills: Extruded aluminum. 2. Car and Hoistway Entrances, Upper Floor Elevator Lobbies: a. Hoistway Fire Rating: 2 Hours. b. Framed Opening Finish and Material: Brushed stainless steel. c. Car Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. d. Hoistway Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. e. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed. f. Door Width: As indicated on drawings. g. Door Height: As indicated on drawings. h. Sills: Extruded aluminum. 2.10 CAR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Elevator Car: 1. Car Operating Panel: Provide main and auxiliary; flush-mounted applied face plate, with illuminated call buttons corresponding to floors served with "Door Open/Door Close" buttons and alarm button. a. Panel Material: Stainless steel; one per car. b. Car Floor Position Indicator: Above door with illuminating position indicators. c. Locate alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than 54 inch above car finished floor. 2. Flooring: To be determined (TBD). 3. Front Return Panel: Match material of car door. 4. Door Wall: Stainless steel. 5. Side Walls: Plastic laminate on plywood. 6. Rear Wall: Plastic laminate on plywood. 7. Hand Rail: Aluminum, at all three sides. Provide open clearance space 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) wide to face of wall. a. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Brushed. 8. Ceiling: a. Frame Finish: Aluminum, brushed finish. b. Lay-in Panel: Aluminum sheet. c. Lighting: LED Lights; As selected from manufacturer's standard line. 9. Provide emergency access panel for egress from car at ceiling. B. Car Accessories: 1. Certificate Frame: Stainless steel frame glazed with clear tempered glass, and attached with tamper-proof screws. 2.11 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized Finish: Class I, AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting this work. B. Verify that hoistway and pit are ready for work of this section. C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 7 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts. E. Verify that electrical power is available and of correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate this work with installation of hoistway wall construction. B. Install system components, and connect equipment to building utilities. C. Mount machines and motors on vibration and acoustic isolators. 1. Place on structural supports and bearing plates. 2. Securely fasten to building supports. 3. Prevent lateral displacement. D. Install hoistway, elevator equipment, and components in accordance with approved shop drawings. E. Install guide rails to allow for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails. F. Accurately machine and align guide rails, forming smooth joints with machined splice plates. G. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls; grout sills in place, set hoistway floor entrances in alignment with car openings, and align plumb with hoistway. H. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime with two coats. I. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1 and ASME A17.2. B. Car Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, without any objectionable lateral or oscillating movement or vibration. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1 will be performed at their discretion. 1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect. 2. Obtain permits as required to perform tests. 3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with requirements. 4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies. 5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements. 1. Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1. 2. Perform tests in accordance with ASME A17.2. 3. Provide at least two weeks written notice of date and time of tests and inspections. 4. Supply instruments and execute specific tests. D. Operational Tests:
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 8 of 10 McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Nexton Square Retail Village 03.23.2018 Berkeley County, South Carolina MPS Project 017091
1. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect. 2. Test single elevator system by transporting at least 6 persons up from main floor to top floor landings during a five minute period. 3. At an agreed time, and the building occupied with normal building traffic, conduct tests to verify performance. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car to minimize passenger discomfort. B. Adjust with automatic floor leveling feature at each floor landing to reach 1/4 inch maximum from flush with sill. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces. B. Clean surfaces and components in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative. C. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Briefly describe function, operation, cleaning and maintenance of each component. D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on cleaning and operation and maintenance of system. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction traffic within car after cleaning. B. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products and materials before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide Initial Maintenance Contract of elevator system and components in accordance with ASME A17.1 and requirements as indicated for 3 months from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform maintenance contract services using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or installer. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. D. Perform work without removing cars from use during peak traffic periods. E. Provide emergency call back service during regular working hours throughout period of this maintenance contract. END OF SECTION
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 9 of 10 Nexton Square Retail Village McMillan Pazdan Smith Architecture Berkeley County, South Carolina 03.23.2018 MPS Project 017091
14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 10 of 10